JP6652471B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  As a gaming machine, there is a gaming machine in which a sound pattern and a lamp pattern are determined based on an effect number (for example, see Patent Document 1). In this gaming machine, a hierarchy is set for the lamp pattern, and a light emission effect is performed with a lamp pattern of a hierarchy having a higher priority.

JP 2009-61148 A

  However, in the technology described in Patent Literature 1, there is only one hierarchical ramp pattern regardless of the game state, and thus the interest of the player may be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of performing a ramp effect in a priority order according to a gaming state.

SUMMARY An advantage of some aspects of the invention is to provide a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, and the like) which is an embodiment of the present invention, and performs an effect (for example, a BGM effect). Light-emitting means (for example, a lamp) that can emit light in a plurality of types of light-emitting patterns (for example, color patterns, blinking patterns, and the like) corresponding to a notice effect, a definitive notification effect, a winning prize winning effect, a probability change winning effect, an error effect, and the like. 9) and a plurality (for example, five) of control data areas (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3 in FIG. 40A) in which control data capable of specifying a light emission pattern can be set. A storage unit (for example, RAM 122 or the like) provided with layer 4 and layer 5 control data areas, and a setting unit (for example, a function unit) for setting control data in each of a plurality of control data areas. Control board 12 and the like, and control means (for example, effect control board 12 and the like) for controlling the light emitting means based on the control data set in the plurality of control data areas. In the gaming state, when any of a plurality of types of conditions (for example, a BGM effect, a special winning opening winning effect, a light-off effect, an error effect, and the like) that can be satisfied in the predetermined game state is satisfied, each of the conditions is satisfied. The control data is set in the corresponding control data area, and the control means sets the control data only in one of the plurality of control data areas (for example, layer 1, When control data is set only in one of the control data areas of the layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, and layer 5), the one control data area Lighting patterns corresponding to the control data set in the area (for example, issuance patterns corresponding to BGM production, large winning opening prize production, turn-off production, notice production, confirmation notification production, positive change prize production, error production, etc.) When the control data is set in a plurality of control data areas of the plurality of control data areas (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, For example, when control data is set in two or more control data areas of the control data areas of the layer 5), the priorities of the plurality of control data areas (for example, in order of lower priority) The light emitting means is emitted in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the control data set in the control data area where the layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, layer 5, etc.) are set high. A plurality of types of conditions are controlled so as to emit light, a first condition (for example, a condition of a big hit state) that is satisfied when a predetermined game state is established, and a specific period in the predetermined game state (for example, FIG. 47 and the like). A second condition (for example, a special winning opening prize) that is satisfied when a specific event (for example, an event of winning a special winning opening) that can occur in the described period from the start of the round to the end of the round occurs. And a third condition (for example, a condition from the start of the round to the end of the round described in FIG. 47 and the like) established during the specific period. The data area includes a first control data area (for example, a first data area, etc.), a second control data area (for example, a second data area, etc.) having a higher priority than the first control data area, And a third control data area (for example, a third data area or the like) having a higher priority than the second control data area, wherein the setting means, when the first condition is satisfied, satisfies the first condition. The corresponding control data (for example, control data for a BGM effect in a big hit state) is set in the first control data area, and when the second condition is satisfied, the control data ( For example, the control data for the special winning opening winning effect, etc.) is set in the third control data area, and when the third condition is satisfied, the control data according to the third condition (for example, the control for the light-off effect Data) is set in the second control data area, and the control data according to the third condition is control data for specifying a pattern for turning off the light emitting means as a light emitting pattern of the light emitting means. Second control data area Control data of the light-emitting pattern which the light emitting means (e.g., notice (hold communication, promotion) effect control data, etc.) in, characterized in that for a possible setting.
Hereinafter, other means will be described.
(1) The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, and the like) according to one embodiment of the present invention has effects to be executed (for example, A light emitting device capable of emitting light in a plurality of types of light emission patterns (for example, color patterns, blinking patterns, etc.) corresponding to BGM effects, notice effects, confirmation notification effects, winning prize winning effects, positive change winning effects, error effects, etc. For example, a lamp 9 or the like) and control means (for example, effect control CPU 120 or the like) capable of controlling the light emitting device are provided, and the control means is provided when the control data is set in the control data area. The light emitting device can be controlled so as to emit light in a predetermined light emitting pattern, and the control data area is one control data area (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3 in FIG. 40A). One of the control data areas of the layer 4 and layer 5 control data areas and other control data areas (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4 and layer 5 control data areas) And at least one of the control data areas (for example, one of the control data areas of Layer 1, Layer 2, Layer 3, Layer 4, and Layer 5). When the control data is set in the control data area, the light emission pattern corresponding to the control data area in which the control data is set (for example, BGM effect, notice effect, confirmation notification effect, large winning opening) It is possible to control the light emitting device to emit light in a winning effect, a probability change winning effect, an error effect, etc.), and to control both control data areas (for example, layer 1 and ray). When control data is set in two control data areas among the control data areas of layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, and layer 5), the priority order (for example, the layer order is ascending). 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, layer 5, etc.) can be controlled so that the light emitting device emits light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the control data area set high. A first data area (for example, a control data area of Layer 1 or the like), a second data area (for example, a control data area of Layer 2 or the like), and a third data area (for example, control of Layer 3) Control data (for example, light-emitting members 9ATL and 9ATR) for controlling the light-emitting device to emit light are provided as control data set in the second data area. There are control data for controlling light emission, etc.) and light-off control data for controlling light-emitting devices to be turned off. Control data (for example, control data for BGM effect) is stored in the first data area. If it is set, light-off control data is set in the second data area, and when the light-off control data is set, control data (for example, a special winning opening winning effect) is set in the third data area. Control data, etc.) can be set.

  According to such a configuration, a light emitting pattern with a high priority can be made more prominent, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

(2) The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, or the like) which is one embodiment of the present invention has effects (for example, A light emitting device capable of emitting light in a plurality of types of light emission patterns (for example, color patterns, blinking patterns, etc.) corresponding to BGM effects, notice effects, confirmation notification effects, winning prize winning effects, positive change winning effects, error effects, etc. For example, a lamp 9 or the like) and control means (for example, effect control CPU 120 or the like) capable of controlling the light emitting device are provided, and the control means is provided when the control data is set in the control data area. The light emitting device can be controlled so as to emit light in a predetermined light emitting pattern, and the control data area is one control data area (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3 in FIG. 40A). One of the control data areas of the layer 4 and layer 5 control data areas and other control data areas (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4 and layer 5 control data areas) And at least one of the control data areas (for example, one of the control data areas of Layer 1, Layer 2, Layer 3, Layer 4, and Layer 5). When the control data is set in the control data area, the light emission pattern corresponding to the control data area in which the control data is set (for example, BGM effect, notice effect, confirmation notification effect, large winning opening) It is possible to control the light emitting device to emit light in a winning effect, a probability change winning effect, an error effect, etc.), and to control both control data areas (for example, layer 1 and ray). When control data is set in two control data areas among the control data areas of layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, and layer 5), the priority order (for example, the layer order is ascending). It is possible to control the light-emitting device to emit light in a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the control data area in which 1, 1, 2, 3, 5, and 5 are set high, and during the first game state (for example, One control data area (for example, a low-base state layer 2 control data area in FIG. 40A) in the low base state of FIG. The light emission pattern when the control data (for example, the control data for the notice B effect set in the control data area of the layer 2 in the low base state in FIG. 40A) is set in the first game Different from state During the second game state (for example, the high base state in FIG. 40A, in the case of a slot machine, a chance zone, etc.), the control data (for example, the high base state in FIG. 40A) is stored in one control data area. It is characterized in that the light emission pattern is different from that when the BGM effect control data set in the control data area of the layer 2 in the base state is set.

  According to such a configuration, a ramp effect can be performed in a priority order according to the game state, so that interest in the game can be improved.

(3) The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, and the like) according to one embodiment of the present invention has effects to be executed (for example, A light emitting device capable of emitting light in a plurality of types of light emission patterns (for example, color patterns, blinking patterns, etc.) corresponding to BGM effects, notice effects, confirmation notification effects, winning prize winning effects, positive change winning effects, error effects, etc. For example, a lamp 9 or the like) and control means (for example, effect control CPU 120 or the like) capable of controlling the light emitting device are provided, and the control means is provided when the control data is set in the control data area. The light emitting device can be controlled so as to emit light in a predetermined light emitting pattern, and the control data area is one control data area (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3 in FIG. 40A). One of the control data areas of the layer 4 and layer 5 control data areas and other control data areas (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4 and layer 5 control data areas) And at least one of the control data areas (for example, one of the control data areas of Layer 1, Layer 2, Layer 3, Layer 4, and Layer 5). When the control data is set in the control data area, the light emission pattern corresponding to the control data area in which the control data is set (for example, BGM effect, notice effect, confirmation notification effect, large winning opening) It is possible to control the light emitting device to emit light in a winning effect, a probability change winning effect, an error effect, etc.), and to control both control data areas (for example, layer 1 and ray). When control data is set in two control data areas among the control data areas of layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, and layer 5), the priority order (for example, the layer order is ascending). 1, a layer 2, a layer 3, a layer 4, and a layer 5) can be controlled so that the light emitting device emits light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the control data area in which the control data area is set high. For example, when the control data is set in the control data area of Layer 2 in FIG. 45, the new control data (the control data that is currently set) is stored in the one control data area. Prohibition means (for example, a priority flag in FIG. 45) for prohibiting setting of different control data and the currently set control data) is provided.

  According to such a configuration, the lamp effect can be diversified even in a limited control data area, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

(4) In the gaming machine of (1), (2), or (3), the control means may control the control data area to which the highest priority is set (for example, the control data area of layer 5 in FIG. 40A). When control data is set in an area or the like, control is performed so as to emit light in a light emitting pattern indicating an error regardless of the gaming state.

  According to such a configuration, an error can be appropriately reported.

(5) In the gaming machine of (1), (2), (3), and (4), first control data (for example, the first light emission pattern that causes the light emitting device to emit light in the first light emission pattern when set in the control data area) The control data for the notice A effect in FIG. 40A) and the second control data for causing the light emitting device to emit light in the second light emission pattern when set in the control data area exist. In the state (for example, the low base state in FIG. 40A), the first control data (for example, the control data for the notice A effect set in layer 3 in FIG. 40A) is the second control data. Is set in a control data area having a higher priority than the control data (for example, the control data of the notice B effect set in the layer 2 of FIG. 40A), and a game state different from one game state (for example, , In the high base state of FIG. The control data (for example, the control data for the notice A effect set in layer 2 of FIG. 40B) is the second control data (for example, the notice B effect set in layer 3 of FIG. 40B). Is set in a control data area having a lower priority than (control data).

  According to such a configuration, a ramp effect can be performed in a priority order according to the game state, so that interest in the game can be improved.

(6) In the gaming machine of (1), (2), (3), (4), and (5), control data (for example, a notice α effect set in the control data area of layer 2 in FIG. 46A) (For example, in the case of a pachinko game machine, the start of the variable display starts, the stop of the variable display ends, and in the case of a slot machine, When the user starts the operation of the start lever and ends when the rotation of all the reels stops, the control means terminates the control of the light emitting device by the control means (for example, FIG. 46A). When the control data area of the layer 2 or the like and the control data (for example, the control data of the pending effect set in the control data area of the layer 1 of FIG. 46B) are set, Whether the game has ended Unchanged, the control data area control continues emitting device by the control means (e.g., FIG. 46 (control data area of the layer 1 of B), etc.), characterized in that a and.

  According to such a configuration, a ramp effect can be performed over a plurality of games, so that the interest of the games can be improved.

(7) In the gaming machine of (1), (2), (3), (4), (5), and (6), a special image (for example, an active display AH or the like) including a digestion display (for example, an active display AH) corresponding to the variable display. An image combining the active display AH and the active display area AHA, etc.) can be displayed, and the display mode of the special image is more highly expected during variable display (for example, “star” shown in FIG. 31B). , And "special thickness" shown in FIG. 32B), and a specific effect (for example, a suggestion effect or the like) suggesting a change to a mode of higher expectation has a plurality of timings (for example, as shown in FIG. 29A). It is characterized in that the degree of expectation that the display mode of the special image changes is different depending on which of timing 1 and timing 3) shown in FIG. 32A is executed.

  According to such a configuration, the player's expectation can be improved by paying attention to the execution timing of the specific effect.

1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command, etc. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number for games counted by the side of the main board. It is a figure which illustrates a change category and a change pattern. It is a figure showing an example of composition of a special figure display result decision table. It is a figure showing the example of composition of a big hit type decision table. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a game control data holding area. It is a figure showing the example of composition of the production control pattern, etc. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning determination processing in the special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of a start winning. It is a flowchart showing an example of a winning random number value determination process. It is a figure showing the example of selection of a fluctuation category decision table. It is a figure showing the example of composition of a fluctuation category decision table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a figure showing an example of setting of a change ratio of a change pattern. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of an at-winning-time effect determination process in an effect control process process. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of a determination ratio of a display mode of a hold display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination ratio by an active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table. It is a figure which shows the example of setting of the determination ratio of the production mode at the time of active display change production execution. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination ratio by the effect execution timing determination table at the time of the 1st system change effect execution. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the image display device. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the image display device. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the image display device. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the image display device. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the image display device. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the image display device. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the image display device. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the image display device. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the image display device. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the image display device. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the image display device. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the image display device. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the image display device. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the image display device. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the image display device. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the image display device. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating another example of setting the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display. It is a figure which shows the other example of a setting of the determination ratio by an active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination ratio by the 1st system detailed pattern determination table at the time of 1st system change effect execution. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an example of a control data area. 5 is a time chart illustrating an example of lamp control. 5 is a time chart illustrating an example of lamp control. 5 is a time chart illustrating an example of lamp control. 5 is a time chart illustrating an example of lamp control. 5 is a time chart illustrating an example of lamp control. 5 is a time chart illustrating an example of lamp control. 5 is a time chart illustrating an example of lamp control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect execution setting process performed in step S532 of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect execution setting process performed in step S532 of the variable display start setting process.

(Embodiment)
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 has a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined hitting ball firing device.

  A normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided in a lower portion of the game area of the gaming board 2. The normal winning prize ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) that is always kept in a fixed open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normally variable winning ball device 6B is an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that change between a normal open state, which is a vertical position, and an enlarged open state, which is a tilt position, by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-type accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided, and a start area (second start area) forms a second start winning port.

  As an example, in the ordinary variable winning prize ball device 6B, when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the ordinary variable winning prize ball device 6B, the game ball passes through the second starting winning opening by the tilting control in which the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state ( Into the open state where it is easy to enter. Note that, even when the normally variable winning prize ball device 6B is in the normally open state, although the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening, it is more likely that the gaming ball enters than in the enlarged opening state. You may comprise so that it may become low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning prize ball device 6B may be configured such that, in the normally open state, for example, by closing the second starting winning port, the game ball does not enter the second starting winning port. As described above, the second start winning opening as the second start area has an enlarged open state in which the game balls easily pass (enter), and a normal open state in which the game balls hardly pass (enter) or cannot pass (enter). Changes to

  A game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by, for example, the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. A game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Note that a winning by detecting a game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening by the first starting opening switch 22A is referred to as a first starting winning. In addition, a winning by detecting a game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning port by the second starting port switch 22B is referred to as a second starting winning.

  A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls based on the fact that the game balls that have passed (entered) the first start winning port are detected by the first start port switch 22A (based on the occurrence of the first start winning). Is paid out as a prize ball, and if the first special figure reserved storage number (described later) is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”), the first special figure game executed on the first special symbol display device 4A. A first start condition (also referred to as a first execution condition) for executing a variable display game, such as a variable display game (described later) or a variable display of a decorative symbol (described later) executed on the image display device 5, is established. A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls passing through (entering) the second start winning opening is detected by the second start opening switch 22B (based on occurrence of the second start winning). If the game ball is paid out as a prize ball and the second special figure reserved storage number (described later) is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”), the second special figure display device 4B executes the second special figure display device 4B. A second start condition (also referred to as a second execution condition) for executing a variable display game, such as a figure game (described later) or a variable display of a decorative symbol (described later) executed on the image display device 5 is satisfied. The number of prize balls paid out based on the first starting prize and the number of prize balls paid out based on the second starting prize may be the same or different. Good.

  The first special figure reserved storage number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the first start winning) that are not executed immediately when the first start winning is generated but are temporarily suspended. Even if the first start condition for executing the variable display game such as the first special figure game (described later) or the variable display of the decorative symbol (described later) is satisfied by the occurrence of the first start winning, the first start is performed. When the first start condition that allows the start of the above-described variable display game due to the occurrence of the winning is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition that has been satisfied first is being executed) That is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is suspended (the variable display game is in a state of waiting for execution). In other words, the first special figure reserved storage number is the number of variable display games due to the occurrence of the first startup prize in the execution waiting state. The first special figure reserved storage number decreases by one each time one first start condition is satisfied.

  Note that the first start condition based on a certain first start winning is satisfied, but the first start condition allowing the start of the variable display game based on the first start winning is not satisfied. The variable display corresponding to the first start winning The information relating to the first start winning is stored (held) as hold data (first special figure hold information) until a first start condition allowing the start of the variable display game by the first start winning is satisfied. In other words, the held first special figure reservation information is digested one by one each time the first start condition is satisfied, and the variable display game based on the digested first special figure reservation information is executed.

  The second special figure reserved storage number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the second start winning) that are not executed immediately when the second start winning is generated but are temporarily suspended. Even if the second start condition for executing the variable display game such as the second special figure game (described later) or the variable display of the decorative symbol (described later) is satisfied by the occurrence of the second start winning, the second start is performed. When the second start condition that allows the start of the above-described variable display game due to the occurrence of a prize is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition that is satisfied first is being executed) That is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is suspended (the variable display game is in a state of waiting for execution). That is, the second special figure reserved storage number is the number of variable display games due to the occurrence of the second start winning in the state of waiting for execution. The second special figure reserved storage number decreases by one each time one second start condition is satisfied.

  Note that the second start condition based on a certain second start winning is satisfied, but the second start condition allowing the start of the variable display game based on the second start winning is not satisfied. The variable display corresponding to the second start winning The information relating to the second start winning is stored (reserved) as suspension data (second special figure suspension information) until a second start condition allowing the start of the variable display game by the second start winning is satisfied. In other words, the held second special figure reservation information is digested one by one each time the second start condition is satisfied, and the variable display game based on the digested second special figure reservation information is executed.

  When the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as “start winning opening”. In addition, when the first start winning and the second start winning are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “start winning”. The number of reserved storages obtained by adding the first special figure reserved storage number and the second special figure reserved storage number is referred to as “total reserved storage number”. When the first special figure reserved storage number, the second special figure reserved storage number, and the total reserved storage number are not particularly distinguished, they are usually simply referred to as “special figure reserved storage number”, but simply referred to as “special figure reserved storage number”. When it is called “storage number”, it may mean any one or two of the first special figure reserved storage number, the second special figure reserved storage number, and the total reserved storage number. When the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as “start condition” or “execution condition”. When the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished from each other, they are also simply referred to as “start conditions”. In addition, the first special figure reservation information and the second special figure reservation information are also simply referred to as “special figure reservation information” unless otherwise distinguished.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in a lower portion of the game area of the gaming board 2 (below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B). The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a special winning opening door that is driven to be opened and closed by a solenoid 82 serving as a special winning opening door shown in FIG. 2, and a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. As a big winning opening as.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is in the off state, the special winning opening door closes the special winning opening, and the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening. Disable it. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is on, the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening, and the game ball passes through the special winning opening (enters). ) In this way, the special winning opening as the specific area changes between an open state in which the game balls easily pass (enter), which is advantageous for the player, and a closed state in which the game balls cannot pass (enter), which is disadvantageous for the player. I do. In addition, instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) the special winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball hardly passes (enter) the special winning opening may be provided.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes through (enters) the large winning opening that has been opened in the special variable winning ball device 7, the gaming ball passes through another winning opening, for example, the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. More prize balls are paid out than when passing (entering). Therefore, when the special winning opening is opened in the special variable winning ball device 7, the game ball can enter the special winning opening, and the first state is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the special winning opening is closed in the special variable winning prize ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult to obtain a prize ball by passing (entering) a game ball into the special winning opening. The second state is disadvantageous for the person.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided on the right side of the game area on the game board 2. The first special symbol display device 4A is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes). The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. The first special symbol display device 4A variably displays (variable display) a special symbol (also referred to as “special symbol”), which is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can identify each of them. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. The special symbol (special figure) variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as “first special symbol”, and the special symbol (special symbol) variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is “ Also referred to as "second special map". In addition, a game executed with variable display of identification information (or variable display of identification information itself) is referred to as a variable display game. In particular, the variable display game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A (variable display game for variably displaying the first special symbol) is also referred to as the first special symbol game, and the variable display game executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. (Variable display game for variably displaying the second special figure) is also referred to as a second special figure game. When the first special figure game and the second special figure game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as “special figure games”.

  The first special symbol display device 4A (the same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B) includes a plurality of types of special figure games including numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. Variable display of special symbols. Each special symbol has a symbol number corresponding to each symbol. As an example, each number indicating "0" to "9" is assigned a symbol number of "0" to "9", and a symbol indicating "-" is assigned a symbol number of "10". I just need. In addition, the special symbol is not limited to a symbol including a numeral indicating “0” to “9”, a symbol indicating “−”, or the like. For example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns (for example, lighting patterns such as the letters L and E in the alphabet) in which the combinations of the ones to be turned on and the ones to be turned off in the 7-segment LED are set in advance and set as special symbols It may be displayed.

  A first hold display 25A and a second hold display 25B are provided on the right side of the game area on the gaming board 2 (above the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B). . The first reservation display 25A is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the first special figure reservation storage number (the number of reservations of the first special figure game) based on the reservation data (first special figure reservation information). A first hold display is displayed to indicate that it is possible. For example, the first reservation display 25A displays the first special figure reservation storage number in a identifiable manner by the number of LEDs to be turned on. For example, if the hold number of the first special figure game is increased by one due to the establishment of the new first start condition, the lighting number is increased by one, and the hold of the first special figure game is held by the establishment of the new first start condition. When the number is reduced by one, the number of lights may be reduced by one. The second hold indicator 25B includes, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the second special figure hold storage number (the hold number of the second special figure game) based on the hold data (second special figure hold information). A second hold display is performed to indicate that it is possible. For example, the second reservation indicator 25B displays the number of second special figure reservation storages so as to be specified by the number of LEDs to be turned on. For example, if the hold number of the second special figure game is increased by one due to establishment of the new second start condition, the lighting number is increased by one, and the hold of the second special figure game is held by establishment of the new second start condition. When the number is reduced by one, the number of lights may be reduced by one.

  On the left side of the game area of the game board 2, a pass gate 41, a normal symbol display device 20, and a general symbol hold display device 25C are provided. A game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by, for example, the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21, if the number of stored ordinary figures (described later) is equal to or smaller than a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”), the ordinary symbol display 20 is displayed. The general figure starting condition for executing the general figure game (described later) executed in is established.

  The normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment or dot matrix LED as in the case of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The ordinary symbol display device 20 variably displays (variably displays) ordinary symbols (also referred to as “ordinary symbols” or “ordinary symbols”) which are a plurality of types of identification information different from special symbols. Note that the variable display game for variably displaying the ordinary symbols is also referred to as the ordinary figure game (or “ordinary figure game”). It should be noted that information relating to the general-purpose game in which the general-purpose start condition is satisfied but the general-purpose start condition (described later) is not satisfied is stored (reserved) as suspension data (general-purpose suspension information).

  The general-purpose reservation display device 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of general-purpose reservation storages based on the reservation data (general-purpose reservation information), for example, by the number of LEDs to be turned on. The number of stored general-purpose games is the number of general-purpose games whose execution has been temporarily suspended without being immediately executed when a game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. Even if the general-purpose start condition for executing the general-purpose game is satisfied by the detection of the game ball by the gate switch 21, the general-purpose start condition allowing the start of the general-purpose game is not satisfied ( For example, when the previously established general-purpose game is being executed, the execution of the general-purpose game is suspended (the general-purpose game is in a state of waiting for execution). In other words, the number of stored general-purpose games is the number of games in the general-purpose game waiting to be executed. The number of stored general-purpose drawings decreases by one each time one general-purpose start condition is satisfied.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), and forms a display area for displaying various effect images.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol display area is arranged. In the decorative symbol display area, decorative symbols, each of which is a plurality of types of identification information (decoration identification information) that can be identified, are variably displayed. The variable display of the decoration identification information (decorative design) is also included in the variable display game. The image display device 5 is a first special figure game (a special figure game using the first special figure) executed by the first special symbol display apparatus 4A, or a second special figure game executed by the second special symbol display apparatus 4B. In response to the game (special figure game using the second special figure), variable display of a plurality of types of decorative symbols is executed in the display area (decorative symbol display area).

  As an example, as shown in FIG. 1, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. Corresponding to the start of any special figure game of the first special figure game or the second special figure game, that is, corresponding to the start of fluctuation of any special figure of the first special figure game or the second special figure game Then, in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation of the decorative symbol (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. After that, in response to the end of the special figure game, that is, in response to the stop display of the special figure, in each of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative design (variable display design, final Stop symbol) is stopped and displayed. That is, in the display area (decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R) of the image display device 5, the variation of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with (corresponding to) the first special figure game (or the second special figure game). , The final decorative symbol (also referred to as a final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed.

  The decorative pattern includes, for example, eight kinds of patterns (alphanumeric characters "1" to "8", Chinese numerals, English characters, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters, or symbols and character images. For example, the character image may be a decorative image showing a person, an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or any other graphic. Each of the decorative symbols has a symbol number corresponding thereto. As an example, it is sufficient that each alphanumeric character indicating “1” to “8” is given a symbol number of “1” to “8”. The number of decorative patterns is not limited to eight, but may be any number (for example, seven or nine) as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a big hit combination and a lossy combination can be configured.

  It should be noted that a fixed display, which is a variable display result of a special symbol (also referred to as a special symbol display result), is stopped and the variable display is terminated, or a fixed decoration symbol (a final stop), which is a variable display result of a decorative symbol. Stop display for stopping the variable display by stopping the display of the symbol, or stopping display of the fixed normal symbol which is a variable display result of the normal symbol (also referred to as a general symbol display result) and terminating the variable display. , Complete stop display, final stop display, or derived display (or simply "derived"). In addition, the change start timing and the change end timing of the decoration symbol do not necessarily need to coincide with the change start timing and the change end timing of the special symbol. It suffices if the fluctuation time is settled.

  In other words, the change start timing of the decorative symbol may be later than the change start timing of the special symbol, or the change end timing of the special symbol (stop display timing of the fixed special symbol) may be changed to the change end timing of the decorative symbol (the fixed decorative symbol (Stop display timing). For example, the execution of the predetermined effect may be started after the fixed decoration symbol is stopped and displayed, and the fixed special symbol may be stopped and displayed at the end of the execution of the predetermined effect. An example of the predetermined effect is a simple on-hold effect (described later) which is one mode of the on-hold effect (described later).

  Further, a stop display different from the complete stop display (final stop display, derived display) may be performed. For example, the decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped and displayed during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation display of the fixed decorative symbol. In the temporary stop display, for example, a decorative pattern whose fluctuation speed is “0” is displayed while being stopped while causing slight shaking or expansion or contraction, or shorter than a predetermined time (for example, one second). It includes a display that stops and displays without causing time, minute shaking, expansion and contraction, and the like.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, a first start prize storage display area 5HL and a second start prize storage display area 5HR are arranged. In the first start prize storage display area 5HL, similar to the first hold display 25A, a first hold display for specifying the first special figure hold storage number is performed. That is, the number of the first special figure games whose execution is currently suspended is displayed so as to be specified. In the first start prize storage display area 5HL, as in the case of the second reservation display 25B, a second reservation display for specifying the second special figure reservation storage number is performed. That is, the number of the second special figure games whose execution is currently suspended is displayed so as to be specified.

  In the first start winning storage display area 5HL, the first hold display may be performed, for example, right-justified. That is, when the number of suspensions of the first special figure game is increased due to the establishment of the new first start condition, if there is no other first suspension display in the first startup winning storage display area 5HL, the first startup winning storage display. On the right side of the area 5HL (the center side of the display area of the image display device 5), a new first hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the increased first special figure hold information, and a first start winning storage display area 5HL. If there is another first hold display, the new first hold is displayed on the left side of the other first hold display (if there are a plurality of other first hold displays, the left side of the leftmost first hold display). A display may be added. Further, in the case where there are a plurality of first holding displays in the first start winning storage display area 5HL, when the holding number of the first special figure game is reduced due to the establishment of the new first start condition, the reduced first number is displayed. The first hold display (the first oldest first hold display) displayed on the rightmost side of the first start winning storage display area 5HL corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special map hold information is deleted, Each of the other first hold displays is moved (shifted) to the erased first hold display side (right side).

  In the second start winning storage display area 5HR, the second hold display may be performed, for example, left-justified. That is, when the number of reserves of the second special figure game increases due to establishment of the new second start condition, if there is no other second reserve display in the second start winning storage storage display area 5HR, the second start winning storage display. A new second hold display is added to the left side of the area 5HR (on the center side of the display area of the image display device 5) as a hold display corresponding to the increased second special figure hold information, and a second start winning storage display area 5HR. If there is another second hold display, the new second hold display is on the right side of the other second hold display (or the rightmost second hold display if there are a plurality of other second hold displays). A display may be added.

  Further, when there are a plurality of second holding displays in the second start winning storage display area 5HR, and when the holding number of the second special figure game is reduced due to the establishment of the new second start condition, the reduced second number is displayed. The second start display (the second oldest display displayed since the oldest) displayed on the leftmost side of the second start winning storage display area 5HR corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special map hold information is deleted, Each of the other second hold displays is moved (shifted) to the erased second hold display side (left side). When the first start winning storage display area 5HL and the second start winning storage display area 5HR are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “start winning storage display area 5H”.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, in addition to the first start prize storage display area 5HL and the second start prize storage display area 5HR, the first start prize storage display area 5HL and the second The hold display erased (moved) from the start winning storage display area 5HR (that is, the first special figure hold information that is consumed when the first start condition is satisfied, and the second special information that is consumed when the second start condition is satisfied). Active display area AHA for displaying a special image representing information including active display (also referred to as display at the time of digestion, this time display, etc.) corresponding to the variable display of the decorative pattern executed based on the special figure reservation information. (Digest display area, Digest display area, Current hold display area, Current hold display area, Active hold display area, Active hold display area, Active display Frequency, time display area, this display area, also referred to as digestion time display.) Is, for example, between a first start winning storage display area 5HL second start winning storage display area 5HR is disposed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the active display area AHA is arranged between the first start winning storage display area 5HL and the second start winning storage display area 5HR. The display area AHA may be arranged at any position in the display area of the image display device 5. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in addition to the active display, an active display frame surrounding the active display, active display or active display such as characters or images displayed around the active display frame or the active display frame. Is displayed as a special image.

  In the game area of the game board 2, in addition to the above-described configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails are provided. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the big winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept in a fixed open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. You may be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as prize balls based on detection of a game ball that has entered any of the general prize holes by a predetermined general prize ball switch. At the bottom of the game area, there is provided an out port for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning ports.

  At a lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to fire a game ball as a game medium toward the game area is provided. For example, the hit ball operation handle adjusts the resilience of a game ball in accordance with the amount of operation (the amount of rotation) by a player or the like. The hit ball operation handle may be provided with a single-shot firing switch for stopping driving of a firing motor provided in the hit ball firing device, or a touch ring (touch sensor).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball loaned by a predetermined ball rental machine is held so that it can be supplied to the hitting ball launching device (reservation). ) Is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower plate that holds (retains) excess balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be able to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, a stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by a player is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the near side on the upper surface of the lower plate main body (for example, the center portion of the lower plate). I have. The stick controller 31A includes an operation rod held by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation rod (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator's hand is hooked when the player grips the operation rod). I have. The trigger button can perform a predetermined instruction operation by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger or the like) in a state where the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 31A with an operation hand (for example, a left hand). What is necessary is just to be comprised as follows. It is sufficient that a trigger sensor for detecting a predetermined instruction operation such as a push-pull operation on the trigger button or the like is built in the operation stick.

  It is sufficient that a tilt direction sensor unit that detects a tilt operation on the operation rod is provided in a lower portion of the stick controller 31A inside the main body of the lower plate. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit includes two transmission-type photosensors (parallel sensors) disposed parallel to the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operation stick when viewed from the side of the player facing the pachinko gaming machine 1. Pair) and two transmission-type photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) that are arranged on the right side of the center position of the operation stick as viewed from the player side and perpendicular to the board surface of the game board 2. What is necessary is just to be comprised including a photosensor.

  The member forming the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 31B at a predetermined position on the near side of the upper surface of the upper plate main body (for example, above the stick controller 31A) or the like, which allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. Is provided. The push button 31B may be configured to be able to mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player. It is sufficient that a push sensor that detects a player's operation performed on the push button 31B is provided inside the body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 31B.

  A sound output member is provided around the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, a speaker 8UL and a speaker 8UR are installed at upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a speaker 8LL and a speaker 8LR are installed at a lower right and left lower part of the upper plate (left and right upper part of the lower plate). Has been installed. Hereinafter, the speakers 8UL, 8UR, 8LL, and 8LR are simply referred to as the speakers 8 unless particularly distinguished. The speaker 8 outputs (reproduces) sound (sound and voice). For example, the speaker 8 outputs an effect sound (also referred to as a sound effect) according to the progress of the game of the gaming machine 1, and outputs a warning sound according to the situation of the gaming machine 1.

  The production sound includes music, detection sound, response sound, notification sound, and the like. The music in the production sound is, for example, a BGM, a song, or the like output according to the progress of the game. The detection sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound or a voice (line, message) output according to a detection result by a switch or a sensor (for example, detection of winning in the first starting winning opening or the like). The response sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound or a voice output in response to an operation of operating the push button 31B. Since the act of operating the push button 31B is also detected by the push sensor, the response sound output in response to the act of operating the push button 31B is also a detection sound. The notification sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound or a voice that is issued to request an operation action on the push button 31B, or a sound or a voice that is provided to notify that the state is shifted to the reach state when the reach state (described later) is changed. A sound or a voice that gives advance notice or suggestion that the game mode is to be shifted to the big hit gaming state before shifting to the big hit gaming state.

  Examples of the warning sound include a warning sound output when the game ball is excessively held (reserved) in the lower dish, a warning sound output when a glass door (not shown) is opened, and the like. .

  Light emitting members (light emitting devices) capable of emitting light in a plurality of types of light emitting patterns corresponding to the effect to be performed are provided inside and around the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, a light emitting member 9CC is provided at an upper position of the image display device 5, a light emitting member 9CL and a light emitting member 9CR are provided at left and right positions of the image display device 5, and a light emitting member is provided at an upper position of the gaming machine frame 3. 9U, a light emitting member 9SL and a light emitting member 9SR are installed at left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a light emitting member 9H for emitting light from the board near the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B is installed. Light emitting members 9ATR and 9ATL are installed at the left and right positions of the variable winning ball device 7. Hereinafter, the light emitting members 9CC, 9CL, 9CR, 9U, 9SL, 9SR, 9H, 9ATR, and 9ATL are collectively referred to as a lamp 9 unless otherwise specified. The lamp 9 may be configured by, for example, one or more LEDs, or may be configured by a flash lamp. The light emitting member 9U may be a rotating light (for example, a police lamp) having a rotating part. In addition to the above, for example, various light emitting members may be installed around each structure in the game area.

  Although the above-described image display device 5, speaker 8, lamp 9, and the like are effect devices for executing effects, the gaming machine 1 may include other effect devices such as effect models having a drive unit as effect devices. Good.

  In addition, the arrangement position (installation position) of each component is an example, and may be arranged at another position. For example, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be provided on the same side (right side or left side) of the game area. Further, for example, the first hold display 25A, the second hold display 25B, and the general-purpose hold display 25C may be provided on the same side (right side or left side) of the game area.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ordinary symbol game is started by the ordinary symbol display 20 based on the establishment of the universal symbol start condition after the universal symbol start condition is satisfied. In the ordinary figure game, after starting the variable display of the ordinary symbol (after starting the variation of the ordinary symbol), after a lapse of a predetermined time, which is the variation time of the ordinary symbol, a fixed ordinary symbol that results in the variable display of the ordinary symbol Is stopped (derived display). At this time, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) such as a number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a fixed symbol other than the symbol per symbol, such as a number or symbol other than the numeral indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed symbol, the variable display result of the symbol is “Loss”. Become. In response to the result of the variable display of the ordinary symbol being “per-figure”, an enlarged opening control (tilt control) in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B is at the tilt position is performed. After a lapse of a predetermined time, the normal opening control for returning to the vertical position is performed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, based on the first start condition being satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied, a special figure game (first special figure game) by the first special symbol display device 4A is started, and the second special figure game is started. After the start condition is satisfied, the second special condition display device 4B starts the special figure game (second special figure game) based on the establishment of the second start condition. In the special figure game, after the variable display of the special symbol is started (after the fluctuation of the special symbol is started), when the variable display time as the special figure fluctuation time elapses, the variable special display result of the special symbol is obtained. Derivation and display of symbols (special figure display results). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol, the special display result becomes "big hit", and a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, a "small hit" is obtained as a predetermined display result. Also, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol, "losing" is obtained.

  After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to a big hit game state as a specific game state in which a round (also referred to as “round game”) advantageous to the player is executed a predetermined number of times. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the small hit game state is controlled as a special game state different from the big hit game state.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as an example, the special symbol indicating the number of “3”, “5”, and “7” is a large hit symbol, and the special symbol indicating the number of “2” is a small hit symbol. The special symbol indicating the symbol "-" is a lost symbol. In addition, each symbol such as a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, and a losing symbol in the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is different from each symbol in the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. It may be designed to be a symbol, or a special symbol common to both special figure games may be a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol.

  After the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the special figure game and the special display result becomes "big hit", in the big hit game state, the big winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to the predetermined upper limit time. The special winning opening is kept open during a period (e.g., 29 seconds or 0.1 seconds) or a predetermined number (e.g., nine) of winning balls. As a result, a round in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is placed in the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player is executed.

  The special winning opening door, which has the special winning opening opened during the execution of the round, receives game balls falling on the surface of the game board 2 and then closes the special winning opening to form a special variable winning prize ball device. 7 is changed to a second state (closed state) disadvantageous to the player, and one round is ended. The round, which is the opening cycle of the special winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, “15”). Note that, even before the number of round executions reaches the upper limit number, the execution of the round may be terminated when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball does not win the large winning opening). .

  Of the rounds in the jackpot game state, the round in which the upper limit time for setting the special variable prize ball device 7 to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player is a relatively long time (for example, 29 seconds) is normally opened. Also called a round. On the other hand, a round in which the upper limit time for setting the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state (open state) is a relatively short time (for example, 0.1 second) is also referred to as a short-term open round.

  Among the special symbols showing the numbers "3", "5", and "7" to be the big hit symbols, the special symbols showing the numbers "3" and "7" are usually open round big hit symbols, and the number "5" Is a short-term open round jackpot symbol. In the big hit game state (normally open big hit state) as a normal open round specific game state controlled after the normal open round big hit symbol is derived as the fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the special winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 7. The door opens the big winning opening in a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) as a first period elapses or a period in which a predetermined number (for example, 9) winning balls are generated. By doing so, a round is executed in which the special variable prize ball device 7 is changed to a first state (open state) advantageous to the player. The normally open big hit state is also referred to as a first specific game state.

  In the special jackpot game state (short-term open big hit state) as the short-term open round specific game state controlled after the short-term open round big hit symbol is derived as the fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the special variable winning ball device 7 is set in each round. The upper limit time for changing to the first state advantageous to the player (the upper limit of the period during which the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening) is shorter than the first period in the normal open big hit state (for example, 0). .1 second). In the short open jackpot state, the opening period of the special winning opening may be controlled to be the second period, and other control may be performed in the same manner as in the normal open jackpot state. Alternatively, in the short open jackpot state, the number of rounds executed may be the second round number (for example, “2”) smaller than the first round number (for example, “15”) in the normal open jackpot state.

  In such a short-term open jackpot state, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of payouts (prize balls) are obtained if a game ball wins in the special winning opening. However, the opening period of the special winning opening is the second period (for example, 0.1 second) and is very short. Therefore, the short-term open big hit state is a big hit game state in which no payout (prize ball) can be obtained. The short-term open jackpot state is also referred to as a second specific game state.

  In addition, the big hit game state as the short-term open round specific game state is not limited to the one in which the open period of the big winning opening is shorter than the big hit game state as the normal open round specific game state. The period (upper limit time) is the same in the short-term open round specific game state and the normal open-round specific game state, but in the short-term open round specific game state, the maximum number of times (for example, two times) in which the special winning opening is opened is set. The number may be smaller than the upper limit number of times (for example, 15 times) in the normal open round specific game state. In other words, the jackpot gaming state as the short-term open round specific game state is such that the period during which the gaming ball easily passes through (enters) the special winning opening in each round is changed from the first period in the normal open round specific game state. The second period is also short, and the number of rounds performed is at least one of the second round number smaller than the first round number in the normal open round specific game state. .

  After the special symbol indicating the number "2" serving as the small hit symbol is derived as the fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the small hit game state is controlled as the special game state. In the small hitting game state, a variable winning operation is performed in the special variable winning ball device 7 in which the big winning opening is changed to a first state (open state) advantageous to the player as in the short-term open big hit state. That is, in the small hitting game state, for example, the operation of setting the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state (open state) over the second period is repeatedly executed.

  In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R arranged in the display area of the image display device 5, a first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A and a second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. In response to the start of one of the special figure games, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is changed to a specific variable during a period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end of the variable display by the stop display of the fixed decorative symbol. There may be a case where a predetermined reach state that constitutes a part of the display combination is reached.

  The reach state is a decorative symbol that is not yet stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 forms a part of the big hit combination (also referred to as a “reach variation symbol”). Is a display state in which the fluctuation is continuing, or a display state in which all or a part of the decorative symbols fluctuate synchronously while forming all or a part of the big hit combination. In the following description, reaching the reach state is also referred to as establishing the reach (reach established). The reach state is also referred to as reach fluctuation. Furthermore, a state in which the decorative symbol is variably displayed and the reach does not fluctuate is referred to as normal fluctuation.

  In addition, in response to the reach state, the fluctuating speed of the decorative pattern is reduced, or a character image (effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative pattern is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. By changing the display mode of the background image, playing back and displaying a moving image different from the decorative symbol, or changing the variation mode of the decorative symbol, a rendering operation different from that before the reach state is executed. May be done. Such an effect operation such as the change of the display mode of the character image and the background image, the reproduction display of the moving image, and the change of the change mode of the decorative pattern is called a reach effect (or a reach effect display). In the reach effect, not only the display operation on the image display device 5 but also the sound output operation by the speaker 8 and the light emission operation (lighting operation, blinking operation, light-off operation) of the lamp 9 and the like are performed before the reach state is reached. An operation mode different from the operation mode may be included.

  As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, depending on the effect pattern, the possibility that the jackpot combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed after the reach effect (also referred to as “big hit expectation” or “big hit reliability”) may be made different. Thereby, the big hit expectation can be made different depending on which of the plurality of types of reach effects is to be executed, that is, which of the reach effects to appear. As an example, in the present embodiment, the reach mode of the normal reach and the reach mode of the super reach having a higher jackpot expectation than the normal reach are set (prepared) in advance.

  Note that the jackpot expectation degree is, for example, (probability of the effect being executed at the time of a big hit) × (probability of a big hit) / ｛(probability of the effect being executed at the time of a big hit) × (probability of being a big hit) + (big hit) It is calculated by (probability that the effect is executed at times other than time) × (probability of not becoming a big hit)｝ (when the big hit expectation is “1”, the variable display result is always “big hit”).

  Also, during the variable display of the decorative symbol, as one mode of the variable display effect, a sliding effect or a pseudo continuous effect realized by a variable display operation of the decorative symbol or the like can be executed. In the slide effect, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then a plurality of decorative symbol display areas (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and the like). After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “2”) of decorative symbol display areas (for example, “left” decorative symbol display areas) in the temporarily stopped and displayed decorative symbol display areas By changing the decorative symbol again in one of or both of the decorative symbol display area 5R and the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R) and stopping the display, the effect display for changing the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed is performed. In this way, in the sliding effect, after a plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols to the derivation display of the determined decorative symbol as a variable display result, the variable number of the decorative symbols is changed. By executing the display again, there are a case where the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state and a case where the decorative pattern constituting the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed without being in the reach state.

  In the pseudo continuous production, in response to at least one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special figure game being established once, the variable decoration result is displayed after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. By the time the symbol is derived and displayed, the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are all decorated symbols (for example, a predetermined pseudo continuous chance is part of any of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R). Is temporarily stopped and displayed again in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a re-variable display, which is an effect display for starting variable display of all decorative symbols again, is performed in a predetermined manner. (For example, up to four times).

  In the present embodiment, the number of times of re-variable display (the number of times of re-variable display) in the pseudo continuous production is a variable display (first variable) until all the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped for the first time in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Display), the number of times of re-variable display (final variable display) after all decorative symbols have been temporarily stopped last time, and the re-variable between the first variable display and the last variable display. This is grasped as a number (X + 1) that is one less than the total number (X + 2) of the display number X (X is 0 or 1 or more). The number of times of re-variable display is the same as the number of times that all decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (number of temporary stops). The first variable display to the first temporary stop display is also referred to as a first pseudo-sequence, the second variable display (first re-variable display) to the second temporary stop display is also referred to as a second pseudo-sequence, The third variable display (the second re-variable display) to the third temporary stop display are also referred to as the third pseudo-sequence, and the fourth variable display (the third re-variable display) to the fourth temporary stop display. Also referred to as the fourth pseudo run. In addition, the number of pseudo-runs in the pseudo-run production is also referred to as the pseudo-run change frequency (or the pseudo-run number). In other words, the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations, the number of re-variable displays, and the number of temporary stops are the same. The increase in the number of pseudo runs such as the first, second, third,... Is also referred to as “continuation of the pseudo run”.

  In the variable display effect of “pseudo ream”, the re-variable display (re-fluctuation) is performed once to four times, so that the decoration symbol can be changed based on the first start condition or the second start condition being satisfied once. It is possible to make the display appear as if it were started two to five times in a row.

  In the pseudo continuous production, before the reach is established in the fluctuation (before reaching the reach state), the pseudo continuous chance is temporarily stopped in any or all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. As illustrated, the decorative symbols in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be temporarily stopped, or after reaching, the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be temporarily stopped. The decorative symbols in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be temporarily stopped so that the pseudo consecutive chances are temporarily stopped and displayed. In other words, the temporary stop display in the pseudo continuous production includes at least a temporary stop display before the reach state and a temporary stop display of the chance symbol after the reach state. You may.

  The slide effect (similar to the pseudo-sequence effect) is a warning or suggestion to the player that any reach effect or a certain reach effect is likely to be executed or that the jackpot is highly expected. You may. Hereinafter, an effect for giving a notice or suggestion to a player that there is a possibility that any of the reach effects or a certain reach effect is executed, or that the jackpot is highly expected, may be collectively referred to as a notice effect. In addition to the slide effect and the pseudo-sequence effect, the notice effect may include a variable display operation different from the slide effect and the pseudo-sequence effect, such as displaying a background image and displaying a message window. There may be one that uses an effect operation that is different from the variable display effect, such as hold display, audio output, and light emission (lighting, blinking, and turning off).

In the present embodiment, when the display mode of the special image representing the information including the active display corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the change is changed as the notice effect, and when the display mode of the special image is not changed, Includes common effects performed by The announcement effect includes a successful effect in which the display mode of the special image is changed after executing the common effect, and a failure effect in which the display mode of the special image is not changed after executing the common operation.
The announcement effect may include a suggestion effect indicating a common effect. In addition, the suggested effect may be an effect that is commonly executed when the display mode of the special image is changed and when the display mode of the special image is not changed, as in the common effect. In other words, an effect that suggests that a common production is performed is referred to as a suggestion production, and a production that suggests that either a successful production or a failure production is performed (common production or common production is Another effect) may be referred to as a suggestion effect.

  Note that the preview effect may be executed (started) before the player can determine (actually confirm) whether or not the content of the advance notice or the suggestion is realized. For example, a notice effect that gives a notice or suggestion to a player that a variable display state of a decorative symbol due to a winning of a certain game ball may be a reach state is at least a variable display state of a decorative symbol due to a winning of the game ball. It may be executed (started) before the reach state (or non-reach state). In addition, a notice effect that gives a notice or suggestion to a player that a variable display result by winning of a certain game ball may be a "big hit" is at least because a finalized decorative design by winning of the game ball is stopped and displayed. May be executed (started) before.

  What is necessary is to include what will become a look-ahead notice effect (also called "advance judgment notice effect") in the notice effects. Prior to the start of the variable display that is the target of the advance notice, the look-ahead preview effect determines whether or not the variable display results in a "big hit" based on the hold information of the special figure game and the like. (Pre-reading), a preview effect to be executed based on the determination result. In the following description, the hold information targeted for the prefetch notice effect is referred to as the target hold information, the first hold display corresponding to the target hold information is referred to as the target first hold display, and the target hold information corresponds to the target hold information. The second hold display to be performed is referred to as a target second hold display, and the variable display corresponding to the target hold information is also referred to as a target variable display. In addition, the pre-reading notice effect is executed when the hold information of the target is consumed (during the process of digesting the hold information of the target including the variable display of the target) and when the information of the target before the hold information is displayed. The execution may be performed while the pending information is being digested, or while the target pending information is being digested, and while the pending information before the target pending information is being digested.

  In a production operation that is a prefetch notice effect by winning a certain game ball, the player, after winning the game ball (after the starting condition is satisfied), determines whether or not the content of the notice notice is realized by the prefetch notice effect. What is necessary is that it is executed (started) before it can be determined. For example, a production operation that is a pre-reading advance notice effect for informing (suggesting) a player in advance that there is a possibility of reaching a game due to a winning of a certain game ball is at least a decoration design by the winning of the game ball. It is sufficient that the variable display state is executed (started) before the variable display state becomes the reach state (or the non-reach state). In addition, a production operation that is a pre-reading notice effect for informing (suggesting) a player in advance that a variable display result may be a “big hit” due to a winning of a certain game ball includes at least the game ball. What is necessary is just to be performed (started) before the fixed decoration symbol by winning is stopped and displayed.

  Note that the pre-reading advance notice effect (preliminary judgment advance effect) includes, for example, a hold change effect that changes the display mode of the first hold display in the first start winning storage display area 5HL, and a change in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. An action effect such as a hold change gassing effect that does not change the display mode of the first hold display may be prepared. In addition, for example, the look-ahead notice effect (preliminary notice notice effect) includes a hold change effect that changes the display mode of the second hold display in the second start winning storage display area 5HR, and a change in the second start winning storage display area 5HR. An action effect such as a hold change gassing effect that does not change the display mode of the second hold display may be prepared.

  When a special symbol to be a lost symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) as a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not become the reach state after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In some cases, a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display mode of the decorative symbol is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that is a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach state after the variable symbol display is started. Correspondingly, a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined reach-losing combination may be stopped and displayed, for example, after a reach effect is executed. Such a variable display result of the decorative symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach loss”) when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a normal big hit symbol such as a special symbol showing a number of “3” is stopped and displayed as a special symbol that is a normal open round big hit symbol as a fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is displayed. In response to the reaching state, after a predetermined reach effect is executed, for example, a predetermined normal jackpot combination (also referred to as a “non-probable variable jackpot combination”) out of a plurality of types of jackpot combinations. The symbol is stopped and displayed. The predetermined normal jackpot combination is, for example, the same type of normal symbol (also referred to as “non-probable variable symbol”) on a predetermined effective line (for example, a horizontal line) formed by the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Are the final stop display combinations. An example of a normal symbol is four types of decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are even numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” among eight types of decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are “1” to “8”. It is.

  The variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which the fixed decorative symbol of the normal big hit combination is stopped and displayed, for example, after a predetermined reach effect is executed, corresponding to the fixed special symbol in the special figure game becoming the normal big hit symbol, In the case where the variable display result is "big hit", it is referred to as a "non-probable change" (also called "normal big hit") variable display mode (also called "big hit type"). Based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit" in the "non-probable change" big hit type, the state is controlled to the normally open big hit state, and after that, the time reduction control (time saving control) is performed.

  By performing the time saving control, the variable display time of the special symbol in the special figure game (variable time of the special figure) is reduced as compared with the normal state. The normal state is a normal game state different from a specific game state such as a jackpot game state, and is an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, an initialization process after power-on, such as when a system reset is performed). The same control is performed as in the state in which is executed. In the time-saving control, a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of the special figure game is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state, and either of the conditions that the variable display result is “big hit” is satisfied first. Sometimes, it may be ended.

  As a fixed special symbol in the special figure game, when a specially variable big hit symbol such as a special symbol showing a number of “7” is stopped and displayed among special symbols that are normally open round big hit symbols, the decorative symbol variable display state is displayed. In response to the reach state, after a reach effect similar to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "normal" is executed, for example, a predetermined probability change big hit combination among a plurality of types of big hit combinations. May be stopped and displayed. In other words, in the special figure game, when the probable variable jackpot symbol is finally stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol which is a predetermined probable variable jackpot combination is finally stopped, and the decorative symbol which is a predetermined normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. May be done. The predetermined probability change jackpot combination is, for example, a combination in which the same type of probability change symbols are aligned on the activated line and finally stopped and displayed. An example of the probable design pattern is an odd design pattern number of “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” among eight design patterns with design numbers “1” to “8”. It is.

Regardless of whether the confirmed decorative symbol is a normal jackpot combination or a probable jackpot combination, in the variable display mode in which the probable variable jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the variable display result is "big hit". In this case, it is referred to as a variable display mode of “probable change” (also referred to as “big hit type”). Based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit" for the big hit type of "probable change", the state is controlled to the normally open big hit state, and after that, the probability variation control (probable change control) is performed together with the time saving control. By performing the probable change control, the probability that the variable display result (special figure display result) becomes “big hit” in each special figure game is improved so as to be higher than that in the normal state. The probable change control may be ended when the condition that the variable display result becomes "big hit" and the state is controlled again to the big hit game state after the big hit game state ends.
Note that, similarly to the time saving control, when the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the big hit game state is ended, the certainty change control may be ended. In addition, even if the probable change control is ended when the “probable change fall” is determined to end the probable change control in the probable change drop lottery executed each time the special figure game is started after the end of the big hit game state. Good.

  When the time reduction control is performed, the control is performed by the normal symbol display 20 so that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the normal symbol game (ordinary symbol fluctuation time) is shorter than that in the normal state, and the normal symbol is changed in each ordinary symbol game. Control to increase the probability that the display result is "per-figure" compared to the normal state, and tilt control of the movable wing piece in the normal variable prize ball device 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is "per-figure". The game ball can easily pass (enter) the second starting winning opening, for example, by increasing the number of times of tilting from the time of the normal state, or by increasing the number of times of tilting than in the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player by increasing the possibility that the start condition is satisfied is performed. As described above, the control which is advantageous to the player by making it easy for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening with the time saving control is also referred to as high opening control. As the high opening control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination.

  By performing the high opening control, the frequency of the second start winning opening being in the enlarged opening state is increased as compared to when the high opening control is not performed. Therefore, the second start condition for executing the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is easily satisfied, and the second special figure game can be frequently executed, so that the next variable display result is obtained. Is reduced to a "big hit". The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which time saving control is performed.

  A game state in which both the time saving control and the high opening control are performed is also referred to as a time saving state or a high base state. The game state in which the probability change control is performed is also referred to as a probability change state or a highly accurate state. The game state in which the time saving control and the high opening control are performed together with the certainty change control is also referred to as a high certainty high base state. A probable change state in which only the probable change control is performed and the time saving control and the high opening control are not performed is also referred to as a highly accurate low base state. In addition, only the game state in which the time saving control and the high opening control are performed together with the certainty changing control may be particularly referred to as a “stable changing state”, and may be referred to as a time saving attached changing state to be distinguished from the high certainty low base state. On the other hand, a probable change state in which only the probable change control is performed and the time saving control or the high opening control is not performed (a high probable low base state) may be referred to as a non-time saving probable change state in order to be distinguished from the highly accurate high base state. A time-saving state in which the time-saving control or the high-opening control is performed without performing the probable change control is also referred to as a low-probability and high-base state. The normal state in which none of the probability change control, the time saving control, and the high release control are performed is also referred to as a low-probability low-base state. When at least one of the time saving control and the probable change control is performed in a game state other than the normal state, the special figure game (second special figure game) can be frequently executed, and the special figure game (first special figure game) Since the probability that the variable display result in the figure game and the second special figure game is “big hit” is increased, the state becomes advantageous for the player. A game state advantageous to a player different from the jackpot game state is also referred to as a special game state. In the following description, simply describing “high base state” indicates a high-precision high base state or a low-precision high base state. When simply described as “low base state”, it indicates a high-accuracy low-base state or a low-accuracy low-base state.

  As a fixed special symbol in the special figure game, a short-term opening round big hit symbol such as a special symbol indicating the number "5" is stopped and displayed, or a small hit symbol such as a special symbol indicating the number "2" is stopped and displayed. In this case, any of a combination of a plurality of types of fixed decorative symbols predetermined as an opening chance may be stopped and displayed without changing the decorative display variable display state to the reach state. In addition, when the short open round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the special figure game, a predetermined reach effect is executed in response to the variable display state of the decorative symbol being in the reach state. After, for example, the fixed decorative symbol which becomes a predetermined reach combination may be stopped and displayed.

  In response to the fixed special symbol in the special figure game becoming a short-term open round big hit symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which various fixed decorative symbols are stopped and displayed is the case where the variable display result is "big hit". This is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as a "big hit type") of "striking" (also referred to as "striking big hit" or "suddenly changing big hit"). Based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit" for the "big hit" big hit type, the state is controlled to the short-term open big hit state, and after that, the time saving control and the positive change control may be performed.

  As a fixed special symbol in the special figure game, a small hit symbol such as a special symbol indicating a number of “2” is stopped and displayed, and based on the variable display result being “small hit”, the small hit game state is controlled. After that, the game state is not changed, and the control is continued to the game state before the variable display result becomes “small hit”. However, when the special figure game in which the variable display result is "small hit" is executed, if the number of executions of the special figure game in the special game state has reached a predetermined number, after the end of the small hit game state, The special game state may end and return to the normal state.

  During the variable display of the decorative symbol whose determined decorative symbol is a non-probable variable jackpot combination or a probable variable jackpot combination, a re-lottery effect may be executed. For example, as a re-lottery effect, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, after temporarily displaying a decorative symbol that is a normal jackpot combination, the decorative symbol is changed again in a state where the same decorative symbol is aligned, and the probability variable jackpot combination is changed. One of a decorative design (probably variable design) and a decorative design (normal design) that is a normal jackpot combination may be finally stopped and displayed as a fixed decorative design.

  After the determined decorative symbol that is a normal jackpot combination is derived and displayed, at the start of the jackpot gaming state or during the round in the jackpot gaming state, the next round starts after any round ends in the jackpot gaming state During the period from the end of the last round in the big hit gaming state until the next variable display game is started, etc. A promotion effect may be performed. In addition, the notification effect similar to the jackpot medium promotion effect may be executed during the first variable display game after the end of the jackpot game state. In the big hit game state, the big hit promotion effect that is executed after the last round is completed may be particularly referred to as “ending promotion effect”.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 has mounted thereon various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also provided with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on a back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly directed to a sub-side control board including a function of setting a random number used in the special figure game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. And a function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer. In addition, the main board 11 controls the lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, a segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to perform the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The variable display of predetermined identification information, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol, and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the ordinary symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring of the ordinary symbol display 20, etc. It also has a control function.

  The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that takes in detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls and transmits the signals to the game control microcomputer 100, and a signal from the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and displays the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the lamp. Various circuits for controlling a staging operation by staging electrical components such as 9 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 performs all or a part of the display operation in the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speaker 8, the light emission (lighting, blinking, and the like) of the lamp 9, and all or part of the light-off operation. It has a function of determining the control content for causing the production electrical component to execute a predetermined production operation.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and for outputting a sound from the speaker 8 based on a command or control data from the effect control board 12. A processing circuit for performing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for controlling the lamp output provided separately from the effect control board 12, and emits light (lighting, lighting, Flashing, etc.), and a lamp driver circuit for turning off the light.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the main board 11 is connected to wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, and the count switch 23. The gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor called a sensor. Should be fine. Note that the gaming machine 1 includes, in addition to the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, and the count switch 23, other switches (for example, a glass door (not shown) connected to the main board 11 in the same manner. ), A switch for detecting the open / closed state of the game board 2 itself, a switch for detecting illegal vibration, and a switch for detecting illegal electromagnetic waves. In addition, the main board 11 has a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20, a first reservation display device 25A, a second reservation display device 25B, and a general drawing reservation display device 25C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as display control is connected.

  The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

  FIG. 3A is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the content of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration. The first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of EXT data is "0". Note that the command form shown in FIG. 3A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 3A, the command 8001H is a first change start command designating the start of change in the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second change start command designating the start of change in the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a variation pattern designating command that designates a variation pattern such as a decorative symbol variably displayed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instruction content of the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for specifying a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, as shown in, for example, FIG. Is set.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating a final stop symbol in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set according to the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. The command 9F00 (H) is a customer waiting demonstration designation command for designating a customer waiting demonstration display.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit game state or a small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a special winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after the opening of the special winning opening that notifies that the special winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type decision result. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big hit type decision result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. . The notification command during opening of the special winning opening or the notification command after opening of the special winning opening differs in EXT data corresponding to the number of times the round is executed (for example, “1” to “15”) in the normal opening big hit state or the short opening big hit state. Is set.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the first starting port switch 22A detects a game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 6A, and the first special winning has been generated. This is a first starting port winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the first special figure game by the symbol display device 4A has been satisfied.

  The command B200H is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning prize ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B, and a second starting winning is generated. This is a second starting port winning designation command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the second special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B has been satisfied.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number so that the first special figure reserved storage number can be specified in the first start winning storage storage display area 5HL or the like. . The command C2XXH is a second reserved figure storage number notifying command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified in the second start winning storage storage display area 5HR or the like.

  In the present embodiment, as the hold storage information, a first start opening winning designation command or a second start opening winning designation command for designating whether the first start winning opening has been started or the second started winning opening has been started. At the same time, a first reserved storage number notification command and a second reserved storage number notification command for specifying the first special figure reserved storage number and the second special figure reserved storage number are transmitted. Note that, when the number of reserved storages increases, a reserved storage number addition designation command (a first reserved storage number addition designation command or a second reserved storage number addition designation command) indicating that the first special figure reserved storage number or the second special figure reserved storage number has increased. While the number of reserved storages is transmitted, while the number of reserved storages decreases, the number of reserved storages subtraction designation command (the number of reserved storages indicating that the number of first special figure reserved storages or the number of second special figure reserved storages has decreased) A command for specifying the number of 1-reserved storage number subtraction or the command for specifying a second reserved-storage number subtraction) may be transmitted.

  Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. Further, a total reserved storage number addition designation command (total reserved storage number subtraction designation command) for notifying the increase (or decrease) of the total reserved storage number may be transmitted.

  The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning-time determination result designation commands) indicating the content of the winning-time determination result. Among them, the command C4XXH is a symbol designating command showing, as the prize-winning determination result, a result of determining whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”, and a result of determining the type of big hit. is there. The command C6XXH is a fluctuation category command indicating a determination result of a fluctuation category (also referred to as “variation pattern type”) as a prize-winning determination result. The fluctuation category is a name when the fluctuation patterns of the decorative symbols are classified (aggregated) by type. In other words, the fluctuation category is a group name of each group including a fluctuation pattern of one or more decorative symbols categorized into a common group. The command E0XXH is an effect control command (error designation command) indicating the occurrence of an error and its content (type).

  In the present embodiment, in the winning random number determination process (see FIG. 15A), the variable display result is determined to be "big hit" based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result when the start winning is generated. It is determined whether or not it is determined to be "small hit". If it is determined to be "big hit", the type of the big hit is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the fluctuation category is determined. The variation category (variation pattern type) is determined based on the random number value MR3 for determination. Then, a value corresponding to the determination result is set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command or the variation category command, and control for transmitting to the effect control board 12 is performed. The effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines whether the variable display result is determined to be "big hit" or "small hit" based on the value set in the symbol designating command, and determines the type of big hit. In addition to being able to recognize, the fluctuation category can be recognized based on the value set in the fluctuation category command.

  The effect control commands such as the fluctuation pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command are used when the effect control CPU 120 controls one or more effect devices (image display device 5, speaker 8, lamp 9, etc.). . Hereinafter, an effect control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5 is a display control command, an effect control command used to control audio output from the speaker 8 is an audio control command, and a light emission operation of the lamp 9 ( The effect control command used to control the lighting operation, the blinking operation, and the light-off operation) is also referred to as a lamp control command. Note that among the effect control commands, there may be a display control command, a voice control command, and a lamp control command.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 that stores a game control program and fixed data, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program to perform a control operation, and updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the CPU 103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 104 to be performed and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing the program read from the ROM 101. At this time, a fixed data reading operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes and temporarily stores various variable data in the RAM 102, and a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 temporarily stores various variable data in the RAM 102 Reading operation, CPU 103 receiving an input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and CPU 103 outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. And a transmission operation for outputting various signals.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 4, in the present embodiment, on the side of the main substrate 11, a random number MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random number MR2 for determining a jackpot type, a random number MR3 for determining a fluctuation category, Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR4 for determining the display result and the random number value MR5 for determining the variation pattern is controlled to be countable. Note that other random numbers may be used to enhance the gaming effect. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

  The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating a part or all of the random numbers MR1 to MR5. The CPU 103 updates various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104 such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of MR5 may be counted.

  Next, a variation pattern of the decorative symbol will be described. Hereinafter, a variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is “losing” is referred to as a “losing variation pattern”. The loss variation pattern includes a “non-reach variation pattern (“ non-reach loss variation pattern ”,“ non-reach ”,“ non-reach variation pattern ”) corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is“ non-reach ”among the variable display results of“ loss ”. (Also referred to as “losing” variation pattern) ”or“ reach variation pattern (“reach loss variation pattern”) corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative design is “reach” in the case where the variable display result is “losing”. ) Is included.

  A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit” is referred to as “hit variation pattern”. The hit fluctuation pattern includes a “big hit fluctuation pattern” corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and a “small hit fluctuation pattern” corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “small hit”. As the big hit variation pattern, a plurality of change patterns corresponding to each of the big hit types may be prepared.

  In the non-reach variation pattern, a plurality of variation patterns having different variation times are prepared in correspondence with the time saving control executed when the total number of pending storages is large or when the gaming state is the probable variation state or the time saving state. Good. Thus, by selecting one of the change patterns according to the total number of held storages and the game state, it becomes possible to perform control to reduce the change time according to the total number of held storages and the game state.

  As a variation pattern including a reach effect such as a jackpot variation pattern or a reach variation pattern, a variation pattern corresponding to a reach mode of each reach effect is prepared. The fluctuation pattern in which the normal reach reach effect is executed is referred to as a “normal reach fluctuation pattern”, and the change pattern in which the super reach reach effect is executed is referred to as a “super-reach change pattern”.

  FIG. 5 shows a specific example of a variation category and a variation pattern in the present embodiment. In FIG. 5, the fluctuation category “PA1” is a shortened / non-reach (loss) fluctuation category. The variation pattern “PA1-1” belongs to the variation category “PA1”. The fluctuation category “PA2” is a non-reach (loss) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PA2-1” to “PA2-3” belong to the variation category “PA2”. The fluctuation category “PA3” is a normal reach (loss) fluctuation category. The fluctuation pattern “PA3-1” and “PA3-2” belong to the fluctuation category “PA3”. The fluctuation category “PA4” is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation category. The fluctuation categories “PA4-1” to “PA4-4” belong to the fluctuation category “PA4”. The fluctuation category “PA5” is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation category. The fluctuation categories “PA5-1” to “PA5-4” belong to the fluctuation category “PA5”. The fluctuation category “PB3” is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation category. The fluctuation pattern “PB3-1” and “PB3-2” belong to the fluctuation category “PB3”. The fluctuation category “PB4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation category. The variation categories “PB4” to “PB4-4” belong to the variation category “PB4”. The fluctuation category “PB5” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation category. The fluctuation patterns “PB5-1” to “PB5-4” belong to the fluctuation category “PB5”.

  The fluctuation pattern “PA2-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PA2” is a non-reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as a non-reach (loss). The fluctuation pattern “PA2-2” is a non-reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which a sliding effect is performed. Note that the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-2” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1” because the sliding effect is executed. The same applies to other fluctuation patterns in which a sliding effect is performed. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PA2-3” is a non-reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. Note that the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-3” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1” because the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed. The same applies to other variation patterns in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed. The fluctuation pattern “PA1-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PA1” is a non-reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is shorter than the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1”.

The variation pattern “PA3-1” belonging to the variation category “PA3” is a normal reach (losing) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length as a normal reach (losing). The fluctuation pattern “PA3-2” is a normal reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once.
The variation pattern “PA4-1” belonging to the variation category “PA4” is a super reach α (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length as the super reach α (loss). The fluctuation pattern “PA4-2” is a super-reach α (loss) fluctuation pattern in which a pseudo-run fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gasp. Note that the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA4-2” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA4-1” because the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is performed as a gas. The same applies to other variation patterns in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed as a gaseous stroke.
The fluctuation pattern “PA4-3” is a super-reach α (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PA4-4” is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (production) is executed twice.

  The fluctuation pattern “PA5-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PA5” is a super reach β (losing) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as the super reach β (losing). The variation pattern “PA5-2” is a super-reach β (loss) variation pattern in which a pseudo-run variation (effect) is executed as a gasp. The fluctuation pattern “PA5-3” is a super-reach β (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PA5-4” is a super-reach β (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-run fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

The fluctuation pattern “PB3-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB3” is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as a normal reach (big hit). Further, the fluctuation pattern “PB3-2” is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (production) is executed once.
The fluctuation pattern “PB4-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as the super reach α (big hit). The fluctuation pattern “PB4-2” is a super-reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-running fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gasp. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-3” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PB4-4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (production) is executed twice.

  The fluctuation pattern “PB5-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB5” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as the super reach β (big hit). The fluctuation pattern “PB5-2” is a super-reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which a pseudo-run fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gasp. The fluctuation pattern “PB5-3” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-run fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PB5-4” is a super-reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-run fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  In FIG. 5, the description of the fluctuation pattern when the big hit type of the small hit fluctuation pattern and the big hit fluctuation pattern is abrupt is omitted, but the loss fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern, This is the same as the reach loss variation pattern) and the jackpot variation pattern (except when the jackpot type is abrupt).

  The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. In the ROM 101, data (for example, information for specifying the content of the control command) constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11, Data and the like constituting a table as shown in FIG. 5 are stored.

  FIG. 6 shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the present embodiment, as the special figure display result determination table, a first special figure display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. 6A and a second special figure display result determination table 130B shown in FIG. It is prepared in advance. The first special figure display result determination table 130A derives and displays a fixed special symbol that is a variable display result in a first special figure game (a special figure game using the first special figure) by the first special symbol display device 4A. Previously, whether to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state or to control the variable display result to the "small hit" to the small hit game state, to determine the special figure display result Is a table that is referred to to determine based on the random number value MR1. The second special figure display result determination table 130B derives and displays a fixed special symbol that is a variable display result in a second special figure game (a special figure game using the second special figure) by the second special symbol display device 4B. Previously, whether to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state or to control the variable display result to the "small hit" to the small hit game state, to determine the special figure display result Is a table that is referred to to determine based on the random number value MR1.

  In the first special figure display result determination table 130A, special figure display is performed according to whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low accuracy state), or a probable change state (high accuracy state). A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the result is assigned to a special map display result such as "big hit", "small hit", or "losing". In the second special figure display result determination table 130B, depending on whether the game state is the normal state, the time saving state (low-probability state), or the probable change state (high-precision state), a disturbance for determining the special figure display result is made. A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the numerical value MR1 is assigned to the special map display result of “big hit” or “losing”.

  In each of the first special figure display result determination table 130A and the second special figure display result determination table 130B, when the gaming state is the probable change state (high accuracy state), it is in the normal state or the time saving state (low accuracy state). More determined values are assigned to the special map display result of "big hit" than when. As a result, in the probable change state (high-precision state) in which the probable change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special map display result is set to "big hit" as compared with the normal state or the time saving state (low-precision state). When the state is controlled, the probability of being determined increases.

  In the setting example of the first special figure display result determination table 130A, a determined value in a predetermined range (a value in a range of “30000” to “30350”) is assigned to the special figure display result of “small hit”. On the other hand, in the setting example of the second special figure display result determination table 130B, the determined value is not assigned to the special figure display result of “small hit”. With such a setting, in the second special figure game, "small hit" does not occur, so that the normally variable winning prize ball device 6B such as a time saving state (low-probability high base state) or a probable change state (high-precision high base state) is formed. In a game state in which game balls easily enter the second starting winning opening, it is possible to avoid occurrence of a "small hit" in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, and to prevent a decrease in gaming interest due to an extension of the game. .

  In the second special figure display result determination table 130B and the first special figure display result determination table 130A, determined values in different predetermined ranges may be assigned to the special figure display result of “small hit”. For example, in the second special figure display result determination table 130B, a smaller determined value than in the first special figure display result determination table 130A may be assigned to the special figure display result of “small hit”. As a result, it is possible to avoid frequent occurrence of “small hits” in a game state in which the game ball easily enters the second start winning port formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B. Alternatively, the first special figure game and the second special figure game may determine the special figure display result with reference to a common special figure display result determination table.

  FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table 131 determines the jackpot type to be one of a plurality of types based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the special map display result is to be set to "big hit" and the big hit game state is to be controlled. Is a table that is referred to. In the jackpot type determination table 131, the first special figure display device 4A executes the first special figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure) or the second special figure display apparatus 4B executes the second special figure game. Depending on whether or not to execute (the special figure game using the second special figure), the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is “non-probable”, “probable”, “probable”. Are assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots.

  In the setting example of the big hit type determination table 131, when the first special figure game is executed, that is, when the special figure to be fluctuated (also referred to as a fluctuating special figure) is the first special figure, the predetermined range determination value ( (Values in the range of “82” to “99”) are assigned to the “big hit” jackpot type, and when the second special figure game is executed, when the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, No determined value has been assigned to the "big hit" jackpot type. With such a setting, the second special map game does not become “probable”, so that a prize ball can be obtained in a game state in which the game ball easily enters the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of difficult "probability" and prevent a decrease in gaming interest due to a delay in the game.

  It should be noted that, depending on the case where the fluctuation special map is the first special map and the case where the fluctuation special map is the second special map, determined values in different predetermined ranges may be assigned to the "big hit" big hit type. . For example, when the fluctuation special map is the second special map, a smaller determined value than when the fluctuation special map is the first special map may be assigned to the "big hit" big hit type. As a result, it is possible to avoid frequent occurrences of “probability” in a game state in which the game ball easily enters the second start winning port formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B. Alternatively, the type of the big hit may be determined by referring to the common table data between the case where the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure and the case where the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure.

  Further, the ROM 101 stores a fluctuation category determination table which is referred to in order to determine any of the plurality of types of the fluctuation category. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variable category determination tables in which the types of the variable categories that can be determined in the variable category determination table and the respective determination ratios are different from each other. In the fluctuation category determination table, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation category is assigned to each of the fluctuation categories. That is, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of fluctuation category determination tables in which the determined values (for example, the range and the number of determined values) assigned to at least one of the plurality of types of the fluctuation categories are different from each other. I have. Instead of a plurality of variation category determination tables, one large variation category determination table including information of all variation category determination tables may be stored in the ROM 101.

  Further, the ROM 101 stores a fluctuation pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine any one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation pattern determination tables in which the types of variation patterns that can be determined in the variation pattern determination table and the respective determination ratios are different from each other. In the fluctuation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number value MR5 for fluctuation pattern determination is assigned to each of the fluctuation patterns. That is, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation pattern determination tables in which the determined values (for example, the range and the number of determined values) assigned to at least one variation pattern among the plurality of types of variation patterns are different from each other. I have. Instead of a plurality of variation pattern determination tables, one large variation pattern determination table including information of each variation pattern determination table may be stored in the ROM 101.

  The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM partially or entirely backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are stored for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply becomes incapable of discharging the backup power supply capacitor). You. In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like (for example, FIG. Process flag). In addition, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating a progress state of the game.

  The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 8, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. I have. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. A control timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure reservation storage unit 151A stores a special figure game in which a game ball has passed (entered) a first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and a first starting winning has occurred but has not yet started. The data (first special figure reservation information) of the reservation data of the first special figure game (first special figure display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure holding storage unit 151A associates the winning order (game ball detection order) with the holding number in the first starting winning opening and associates the CPU 103 with a random number based on the passage (entry) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 and the like are stored as pending data (first special figure pending information) until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”).

  The second special figure holding storage unit 151B is a special figure game in which the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B and the second starting winning has been generated, but the second starting winning has not been started yet. The storage data (second special figure reservation information) of the (second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special map holding storage unit 151B associates the winning order (game ball detection order) with the holding number in the second starting winning opening and associates the holding number with the CPU 103 based on the passing (entering) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 and the like are stored as suspension data (second special figure suspension information) until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”).

  It should be noted that the first special figure display device 4A holds the first special figure game hold data (first special figure hold information based on the establishment of the first start condition) and the second special figure display device 4B holds the second special figure game. The holding data (second special figure holding information based on the establishment of the second start winning) may be stored in a common holding storage unit in association with the holding number.

  The general figure hold storage unit 151C stores the hold data (normal figure hold) related to the general figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. Information). For example, the general figure holding storage unit 151C determines the general figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 and the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball, in association with the reservation number in the order in which the game ball passed through the passage gate 41. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for use is stored as hold data (general-purpose hold information) until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The game control flag setting section 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

  The game control timer setting section 153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating a timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting a count value used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores a first reserved storage number count value and a second special figure reserved storage number, which are storage values of a first reserved storage number counter for counting the first special figure reserved storage number. The second reserved storage number count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter for counting, the total reserved storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved storage number counter for counting the total reserved storage number, and the like. It is memorized.

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 has an input port for taking in various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 provides an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 120. RAM 122, a display control unit 123 that performs processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and a random number that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the effect control CPU 120. The circuit 124 and the I / O 125 are mounted.

  As an example, in the effect control board 12, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 121, a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric components is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads fixed data from the ROM 121, a fixed data read operation, the effect control CPU 120 writes various variable data in the RAM 122, and temporarily stores the variable data, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the variable data in the RAM 122. A fluctuation data reading operation for reading various fluctuation data temporarily stored, a reception operation in which the effect control CPU 120 receives input of various signals from outside the effect control board 12 via the I / O 125, and an effect control CPU 120 A transmission operation of outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via the O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

  The effect control board 12 has a wiring for transmitting an information signal (video signal) indicating an effect image to the image display device 5 and a signal for transmitting an information signal (effect sound signal) indicating a command to the audio control board 13. Wiring, wiring for transmitting an information signal (illumination signal) indicating a command to the lamp control board 14, and the like are connected. Further, the effect control board 12 has a wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that a player's operation action on the stick controller 31A has been detected from the controller sensor unit 35A, and a game for the push button 31B. Wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that a user's operation has been detected from the push sensor 35B is also connected.

  In the effect control board 12, numerical data indicating various random numbers used for controlling the effect operation is renewably counted by, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like. The random number used to control such a production operation is also referred to as a production random number.

  The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the effect control program. For example, the ROM 121 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, and the like prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings.

  For example, the ROM 121 stores a hold display mode determination table that is referred to to determine one of a plurality of types of the display mode of the first hold display displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. I have. Specifically, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of pending display mode determination tables that differ from each other in the types of display modes that can be determined in the pending display mode determination table and the respective determination ratios. In the hold display mode determination table, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number value MR6 (not shown) for determining the display mode of the first hold display is assigned to each of the display modes of the first hold display. . Instead of a plurality of pending display mode determination tables, one large pending display mode determination table including information of all the pending display mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

  Further, for example, the ROM 121 stores a hold display mode determination table that is referred to to determine the display mode of the second hold display displayed in the second start winning storage display area 5HR to any one of a plurality of types. Have been. Specifically, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of pending display mode determination tables that differ from each other in the types of display modes that can be determined in the pending display mode determination table and the respective determination ratios. In the pending display mode determination table, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number value MR6 (not shown) for determining the display mode of the second pending display is assigned to each of the display modes of the second pending display. . Instead of a plurality of pending display mode determination tables, one large pending display mode determination table including information of all the pending display mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

  Further, the ROM 121 stores a pending effect execution presence / absence determination table which is referred to to determine whether or not to carry out a pending effect (also referred to as an action effect or a pending change effect). Specifically, in the pending effect execution presence / absence determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random value MR7 (not shown) for determining whether or not to perform the pending effect in each of the case where the pending effect is not executed and the case where the reserved effect is executed. Is assigned. In the present embodiment, the hold effect is a look-ahead notice effect in which the display mode of the hold display displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL is changed to a notice mode, and a display in the second start winning storage display area 5HR. And changing the display mode of the held display to the advance notice mode. Note that there are a plurality of types of hold effects, and there is also a hold change effect in which a character or the like acts on the hold display to change the display mode of the hold display in the display area of the image display device 5. The hold change effect also includes a hold change gassed effect in which a character or the like acts on the hold display in the display area of the image display device 5 but does not change the display mode of the hold display.

  In addition, the ROM 121 stores an active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table which is referred to to determine whether or not to execute an active display change effect (successful effect) for changing a special image including an active display. Specifically, the active display change execution presence / absence determination table is compared with a random number value MR7 (not shown) for determining whether or not to execute the active display change effect, in each of the case where the active display change effect is not executed and the case where the active display change effect is executed. Numerical values (determined values) are assigned.

  In the present embodiment, the active display change effect is an effect of changing a special image to a notice mode (main notice effect). In other words, the active display, the active display frame surrounding the active display, information according to the active display (for example, the active display or characters or images displayed around the active display or around the active display frame) are set in the notice mode. This is an effect to be changed (main announcement effect). As described above, in the active display change effect, a common effect, a successful effect (also referred to as an active display change effect) executed when changing the special image after executing the common effect, and a common effect were executed. A failure effect (also called an active display change gaseous effect) that is executed when the special image is not changed later is included. The successful effect is an effect that acts on the special image in the display area of the image display device 5 to change the display mode of the special image. On the other hand, the failure effect does not change the display mode of the special image by not acting on the special image in the display area of the image display device 5, or acts on the special image in the display region of the image display device 5 but does not affect the special image. An effect that does not change the display mode.

  Further, the active display change effect includes a first system change effect in which the mode of the special image is a change of the first system and is changed to any one of a plurality of modes, and a change of the special image in the second system. And a second system change effect for changing to any one of a plurality of modes. The first system change effect includes a common effect, a success effect, and a failure effect according to the first system change effect, and the second system change effect corresponds to the second system change effect. There are common effects, successful effects, and failed effects. In the present embodiment, the first system change effect is an effect that changes the display mode of an active display (active display displayed as a special image) in the special image, and the second system change effect is an effect in the special image. Of the active display frame (active display frame displayed as a special image).

  Further, the ROM 121 stores the first system change effect referred to in order to determine the execution timing of the first system change effect, which is one of the active display change effects (ie, the timing at which to execute the change). An effect execution timing determination table is stored. In the first system change effect, the rate at which the successful effect related to the first system change effect is executed differs depending on the execution timing of the first system change effect. Further, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of effect execution timing determination tables of the first system change effect that are different from each other in the types of execution timing and the respective determination ratios that can be determined in the execution timing determination table of the first system change effect. It may be. In the first system change effect execution timing determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the first system change effect execution timing is assigned to each execution timing. I have. Also, instead of the plurality of first system change effect execution timing determination tables, one large first system change effect execution timing determination table including information of all the first system change effect execution timing determination tables is stored in ROM 121. You may memorize it.

  In addition, the ROM 121 stores a second system change reference, which is referred to for determining the execution timing of the second system change effect, which is one of the active display change effects (ie, the timing at which to execute the change). A performance execution timing determination table is stored. In the second system change effect, the rate at which the successful effect related to the second system change effect is executed differs depending on the execution timing of the second system change effect. Further, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of effect execution timing determination tables of the second system change effect that are different from each other in the types of execution timing and the respective determination ratios that can be determined in the execution timing determination table of the second system change effect. May be. In the second system change effect execution timing determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the second system change effect execution timing is assigned to each execution timing. I have. Further, instead of the plurality of second system change effect execution timing determination tables, one large second system change effect execution timing determination table including information of all the second system change effect execution timing determination tables is stored in ROM 121. You may memorize it.

  Note that the ROM 121 stores a plurality of first system changes in which types of execution timings and respective determination ratios which can be determined in the execution timing determination table of the first system change effect and the execution timing determination table of the second system change effect are different from each other. The performance effect execution timing determination table of the effect and the execution timing determination table of the second system change effect may be stored as one large active display change effect execution timing determination table. In the execution timing determination table of the active display change effect, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the first system change effect and the second system Numerical value (determined value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the change effect, and a random value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of both the first system change effect and the second system change effect A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with may be assigned. Further, instead of the plurality of active display change effect execution timing determination tables, one large active display change effect execution timing determination table including information of all active display change effect execution timing determination tables is stored in ROM 121. Is also good.

  Further, the ROM 121 stores an active display change effect pattern determination table which is referred to for determining an effect pattern (effect mode) of the active display change effect to one of a plurality of types. Specifically, in the effect pattern determination table of the active display change effect stored in the ROM 121, a random number value (not shown) for determining the effect pattern of the active display change effect is provided for each of the effect patterns of the active display change effect. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with is assigned.

  Note that the ROM 121 may store a pending change effect execution timing determination table that is referred to to determine the execution timing of the pending change effect (the timing of how many changes to execute). In addition, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of pending change effect execution timing determination tables having different types of execution timing and respective determination ratios that can be determined in the pending change effect execution timing determination table. In this hold change effect execution timing determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the hold change effect execution timing may be assigned to each execution timing. Instead of a plurality of pending change effect execution timing determination tables, one large pending change effect execution timing determination table including information of all the pending change effect execution timing determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

The ROM 121 stores a main announcement effect pattern determination table that is referred to to determine any one of a plurality of types of effect patterns (effect modes) of the main announcement effect other than the active display change effect described above. May be. In this case, specifically, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of main announcement effect pattern determination tables that differ from each other in the type of the main announcement effect pattern that can be determined in the main announcement effect pattern determination table and the respective determination ratios. In the main announcement effect pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value MR9 (not shown) for determining the main announcement effect pattern is assigned to each of the main announcement effect patterns. Good.
Instead of a plurality of main announcement effect pattern determination tables, one large main announcement effect pattern determination table including information of all the main announcement effect pattern determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

  Note that the ROM 121 may store a pending change effect pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine the effect pattern (effect mode) of the pending change effect to one of a plurality of types. In this case, in the ROM 121, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining a pending change effect pattern is assigned to each of the pending change effect patterns in the pending change effect pattern determination table. Just do it.

  It should be noted that the ROM 121 may store a table for determining whether or not to perform the change-on-change production, which is referred to for determining whether or not to perform the change-on-change production. In this case, in the pending change gaseous production effect execution presence / absence determination table, a numerical value (not shown) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining whether or not to execute the pending change gaseous effect, respectively, without and with execution of the pending change gaseous effect (Determined value) may be assigned.

  It should be noted that the ROM 121 may store a pending change gasse effect execution timing determination table that is referred to for determining the execution timing of the pending change gaseous effect production (timing such as the number of subsequent changes to be executed). . In this case, the ROM 121 only needs to store a plurality of pending change gasket effect execution timing determination tables having different types of execution timings and respective determination ratios that can be determined in the hold change gaseous effect production execution timing determination table. . A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the hold change gasse effect may be assigned to each of the execution timings in the hold change gaseous effect execution timing determination table. . It should be noted that one large change-in-change gaseing effect execution timing determination table including information of all the change-in-change gaseous effect execution timing determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121 instead of the plurality of change-in-change gaseous effect execution timing determination tables.

  It should be noted that the ROM 121 may store a pending change gassing effect pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine any one of a plurality of types of effect patterns (effect modes) of the pending change gassing effect. In this case, in the ROM 121, in the hold change gaseing effect pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for holding change gaseous effect pattern determination is provided for each of the hold change gaseous effect effect patterns. It may be assigned.

  In addition, the ROM 121 stores an active display mode determination table (also referred to as a “digestion display mode determination table”) that is referred to for determining one of a plurality of types of the active display mode displayed in the active display area AHA. May be stored. In this case, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of active display display mode determination tables that differ from each other in the types of display modes that can be determined in the active display display mode determination table and the respective determination ratios. In the active display display mode determination table, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the active display display mode may be assigned to each of the active display display modes. That is, in the ROM 121, a plurality of active display display modes in which the determined values (for example, the range and the number of the determined values) assigned to at least one of the plurality of types of active display modes are different from each other. What is necessary is that the decision table is stored. Instead of the plurality of active display display mode determination tables, one large active display display mode determination table including information of all active display display mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

  The ROM 121 includes a plurality of effect control patterns that are used by the effect control CPU 120 to control an effect operation by various effect devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, and the effect model). Data to be stored is stored. By setting the effect control pattern, various variable display operations such as decorative designs and notice effects (including pre-read notice effects) are realized.

  The various effect control patterns are configured from data indicating the control contents of various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the effect control pattern corresponds to a plurality of types of variation patterns, and is a decoration in a period from the start of the variation of the special symbol in the special figure game to the derivation and display of the final special symbol as a special figure display result. Variable display operation of symbols, reach operation, re-lottery effect, etc., or various effect operations not accompanied by variable display of decorative symbols (for example, hold for display mode of hold display in first start winning storage display area 5HL) Such as an effect and a hold effect on the display mode of the hold display in the second start winning storage display area 5HR).

  FIG. 9A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. The production control pattern is composed of control data for controlling various production operations, such as a production control process timer determination value, display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and end code. What is necessary is that the contents of various effect controls, the timing of switching the effect control, and the like be set in series. In addition, the effect control pattern may include, for example, movable member control data that specifies the content of operation control and the like in a movable member provided inside or outside the game area. The effect control process timer judgment value is a value (judgment value) to be compared with the value of the effect control process timer (effect control process timer value) provided in a predetermined area of the effect control RAM incorporated in the effect control microcomputer 120. ), And a determination value corresponding to the execution time (effect time) of each effect operation is set in advance. Note that, instead of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 11 or a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control microcomputer 120. In response to predetermined control contents and processing contents, such as a fact, data indicating a switching timing of effect control may be set.

  The display control data includes, for example, data indicating a display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, such as data indicating a variation mode of each decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the display control data is data for specifying the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5. The audio control data includes, for example, data indicating an audio output mode from the speaker 8 such as data indicating an output mode of a production sound or the like interlocked with the variable display operation of the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the audio control data is data for specifying an audio output operation from the speaker 8. The lamp control data includes, for example, data indicating a light emitting operation mode of the lamp 9 (light emitting body). That is, the lamp control data is data for specifying the light emission operation (lighting operation, blinking operation, light-off operation) of the lamp 9. The operation detection control data includes, for example, data indicating a period during which an operation on an operation unit such as the operation button 30 is effectively detected, control contents of a staging operation when the operation is detected, and the like. That is, the operation detection control data is data for designating an effect operation according to an operation on the operation unit. Note that these control data need not be included in all effect control patterns, but are effect control patterns configured to include some control data in accordance with the content of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be.

  FIG. 9B is a diagram for explaining various effect operations performed in accordance with the contents of the effect control pattern. The effect control CPU 120 determines the control content of the effect operation in accordance with various control data included in the effect control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches any of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination value, and the character is displayed. Control is performed to display effect images such as images and background images on the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, control is performed to output sound from the speaker 8 in a mode specified by the voice control data, and control is performed to cause the lamp 9 to emit light in a mode specified by the lamp control data. During the validity period, an operation on the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is accepted to perform control for determining the effect contents. Dummy data (data for which control is not specified) may be set as data corresponding to an effect component that does not become a control target even if it corresponds to the effect control process timer determination value.

  The rendering operation shown in FIG. 9 (B) corresponds to the entire period from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the final stop, but is not limited to this, and is performed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. An effect control pattern for executing an effect operation corresponding to a part of a period (for example, a period for executing a notice effect) may be provided. Alternatively, in order to execute the rendering operation in response to a predetermined period other than the variable display of the decorative symbol (for example, a period in which a round is being executed in the big hit game state, a period in which the ending effect is executed at the end of the big hit game state). Effect control pattern may be provided.

  When setting the effect control pattern, pattern data constituting the effect control pattern may be read out from the ROM 121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. The storage address in the ROM 121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the read position of the storage data in the ROM 121 may be simply specified. Thereafter, each time the effect control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not the effect control process timer value matches any of the effect control process timer values. Control. As described above, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect devices (the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, the The control of the movable member of the production model) is advanced. In each of the process data # 1 to process data #n, the display control data # 1 to display control data #n and the voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with the effect control process timer determination values # 1 to #n. The data #n, the lamp control data # 1 to the lamp control data #n, and the operation detection control data # 1 to the operation detection control data #n indicate the control contents of the effect operation in the effect device, and an effect for designating execution of the effect control. Control execution data # 1 to effect control execution data #n are configured.

  A command according to the effect control pattern set in this way is output from the effect control CPU 120 to the display control unit 123, the voice control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. In the display control unit 123 receiving the instruction from the effect control CPU 120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like reads out the image data indicated by the instruction from an image data memory such as a CGROM and temporarily stores the image data in a VRAM. In the voice control board 13 which receives the instruction from the effect control CPU 120, the voice synthesis IC reads out the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores the voice data in the voice RAM or the like. .

  In the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation, for example, an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. Is provided. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 10A includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194. I have.

  The effect control flag setting unit 191 includes a plurality of types of effect operation states such as a display state of an effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and a plurality of states whose states can be updated according to an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations, such as an effect image display operation on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating a timer value for each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting section 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the present embodiment, data constituting the first start winning reception command buffer 194A as shown in FIG. 10B is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The first start winning reception command buffer 194A is provided with a storage area (an area corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total number of suspended storages. . When there is a start winning in the first starting winning opening, a starting opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command), a symbol designation command, a fluctuation category command, a retained storage number notification command (first retained storage number notification command). ) Are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. A storage area is secured in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A so that a symbol designation command, a fluctuation category command, and a first reserved storage number notification command can be stored in association with each other.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores the commands in the order in which they were received at the time of the first start winning prize, from the beginning in the free area of the first start prize receiving command buffer 194A. At the time of the first start winning, a command is transmitted in the order of the first start opening winning designating command, the symbol designating command, the variable category command, and the first retained storage number notification command. Therefore, if the command reception is normally performed, as shown in FIG. 10B, the starting opening winning designating command, the symbol designating command, and the variation are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. The category command and the first reserved storage number notification command are stored in this order. In FIG. 10B, commands are stored in storage areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “3”.

  The command stored in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 10B is deleted one by one every time the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in synchronization with the first special figure game. Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (the winning order between commands). Specifically, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the first special figure game, the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands associated with the first starting port winning designation command is set. One of the stored commands (one set) is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (corresponding to the first starting port winning designation command). Command) is shifted while maintaining the winning order (buffer number relationship).

  For example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in synchronization with the first special figure game in the storage state shown in FIG. 10B, the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “1” is deleted. The command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the buffer number “1”, and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “3” is changed to the buffer number “2”. Will be shifted.

  In the present embodiment, data constituting the second start winning reception command buffer 194B as shown in FIG. 10C is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The second start winning reception command buffer 194B is provided with storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total number of suspended storages. . When there is a start winning in the second starting winning opening, a starting opening winning designating command (second starting opening winning designating command), a symbol designating command, a variable category command, a retained storage number notification command (second retained storage number notification command). ) Are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. A storage area is secured in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B so that a symbol designation command, a fluctuation category command, and a pending storage number notification command can be stored in association with each other.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores the commands in the order in which they were received at the time of the second start winning prize, from the beginning in the free area of the second start prize receiving command buffer 194B. At the time of the second starting winning, the command is transmitted in the order of the second starting opening winning designating command, the symbol designating command, the variable category command, and the retained storage number notification command. Therefore, if the command is normally received, as shown in FIG. 10 (C), the second starting opening prize designation command and the symbol designation command are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. , A fluctuation category command, and a pending storage number notification command. In FIG. 10C, commands are stored in storage areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” and “2”.

  The command stored in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B shown in FIG. 10C is deleted one by one each time the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in synchronization with the second special figure game. Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (the winning order between commands). More specifically, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the second special figure game, the variable corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands associated with the second starting opening winning designation command is set. One of the stored commands (one set) is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (corresponding to the second starting port winning designation command). Command) is shifted while maintaining the winning order (buffer number relationship).

  For example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in synchronization with the second special figure game in the storage state shown in FIG. 10C, the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “1” is deleted. The command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the buffer number “1”.

  In the present embodiment, data configuring the first prefetch notice buffer 194C as shown in FIG. 10D is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The first prefetch notice buffer 194C is provided with storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the respective data constituting the first start winning reception command buffer 194A. That is, the first look-ahead notice buffer 194C stores the contents of the decision regarding the look-ahead notice effect regarding each of the hold information determined by the effect control CPU 120 or the like in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. Is done. When the hold data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A of FIG. 10B due to the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, etc. In the first prefetch notice buffer 194C, the content associated with the buffer number is also deleted. In addition, due to the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the hold data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is stored in another buffer in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A of FIG. When shifting to a number, the content associated with the buffer number in the first prefetch notice buffer 194C is also shifted to the other buffer number.

  In the present embodiment, data configuring the second prefetch notice buffer 194D as shown in FIG. 10E is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The second prefetch notice buffer 194D is provided with storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers "1" to "4") corresponding to the respective data constituting the second start winning reception command buffer 194B. That is, in the second look-ahead notice buffer 194D, the contents of the decision regarding the look-ahead notice effect regarding each of the hold information determined by the effect control CPU 120 and the like are stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. Is done. When the suspended data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B of FIG. 10C due to the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, etc. In the second prefetch notice buffer 194D, the content associated with the buffer number is also deleted. In addition, due to the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, etc., the hold data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is stored in another buffer in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B of FIG. When shifting to a number, the content associated with the buffer number in the second prefetch notice buffer 194D is also shifted to the other buffer number.

  Next, an operation (operation) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  In the main board 11, when the power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs the necessary initialization after setting the interruption to be prohibited. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 102 is cleared. Further, a register of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set. As a result, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, every 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process. When the initialization is completed, an interrupt is permitted, and then a loop process is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed, and then the loop process may be started.

  Upon receiving the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receiving the interrupt request, the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, so that the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port via the switch circuit 110. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S12). At this time, if necessary, for example, after the main-side error processing is completed, the command control processing (step S17) of the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. An error designation command is transmitted to the board 12. Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, data such as big hit information, start information, probability variation information and the like supplied to, for example, a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 are output (step). S13).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as the random numbers MR1 to MR5 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S14). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S15). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol are displayed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the display operation on the display device 4B and set the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Subsequent to the special symbol process, a normal symbol process is executed (step S16). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on and off the segment LED) on the ordinary symbol display 20 by executing the ordinary symbol process process, and thereby the variable display of the ordinary symbol and the movable operation of the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B. Enables setting of the tilting motion of the wing pieces.

  After executing the normal symbol process process, the CPU 103 executes the command control process to transmit a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, the output control included in the I / O 105 corresponds to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155. After setting control data in an output port for transmitting a production control command to the substrate 12, setting predetermined control data in an output port of the production control INT signal, and setting the production control INT signal to an ON state for a predetermined time. For example, by setting the state to the off state, the effect control command can be transmitted based on the setting in the command transmission table. After the command control process is executed, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated after the interrupt control is set.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S15 illustrated in FIG. 11 as a special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). FIG. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S101 of FIG. 12 as a start winning determination process. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S208 and step S211 in FIG. FIG. 15A is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S220 in FIG. 14 as a winning random number value determination process.

  In the start winning determination process in the special symbol process shown in FIG. 13, the CPU 103 first detects the detection signal from the first starting port switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not the first starting port switch 22A is on based on (step S201). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (step S201; Yes), the first special figure reserved storage number (the reserved number of the first special figure game) is increased to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, as the upper limit stored number). Is determined (step S202). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to identify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. When the first special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; No), for example, the storage value of the starting port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to “1” ( Step S207).

  When the first starting port switch 22A is turned off in step S201 (step S201; No), when the first special figure reserved storage number reaches the upper limit in step S202 (step S202; Yes), After executing the processing of step S209, the second starting port switch 22B is set based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning port formed by the normally variable winning prize ball device 6B. It is determined whether or not is turned on (step S203). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (Step S203; Yes), the second special figure reserved storage number (the reserved number of the second special figure game) is increased to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, as the upper limit stored number). Is determined (step S204). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. When the second special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step S204 (step S204; No), for example, the stored value of the starting port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to “2” ( Step S210).

  After executing the processing of step S207, the processing for starting winning (FIG. 14) is executed (step S208), the stored value of the starting opening buffer is set to "0 (initialized)" (step S209), and the processing of step S203 is performed. Proceed to. After executing the processing of step S210, the start winning processing (FIG. 14) is executed (step S211), the stored value of the starting opening buffer is set to "0 (initialized)" (step S212), and the start winning determination processing is performed. To end. Thus, even when the first start switch 22A and the second start switch 22B simultaneously detect the start winning of the game ball, the processing based on the respective detections can be completed.

  The CPU 103 updates the start winning prize processing (steps S208 and S211) so as to add 1 to the special figure reserved storage number corresponding to the starting port buffer value which is the stored value of the starting port buffer (step S215 in FIG. 14). . For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is added by one, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is added by one. In this way, the first reserved storage number count value is updated so as to increase by one when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning port and the first start condition is satisfied. The second reserved storage number count value is updated so as to increase by one when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning port and the second start condition is satisfied. Subsequent to the process of step S215, the total number of pending storages is updated so as to be incremented by 1 (step S216). For example, the total reserved storage number count value, which is the storage value of the total reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, may be updated so as to be incremented by one.

  After executing the processing of step S216, the CPU 103 selects the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154. Data representing the random number value MR2 for use in determining the variation category and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category are extracted (step S217). The numerical data indicating each random number value thus extracted is stored by being set as suspension information at the head of an empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit 151 corresponding to the starting port buffer value (step S218). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are set in the first special figure holding storage unit 151A, while when the starting port buffer value is “2”, Numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are set in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S218, transmission setting of a start-up winning award designation command according to the start-up opening buffer value is performed (step S219). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and the effect control board is stored. The setting for transmitting the first start-up winning award designation command to the player 12 is performed. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is “2”, the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, for example, to the effect control board 12. The setting for transmitting the second starting port winning designation command is performed. The starting port winning designation command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control processing of step S17 shown in FIG. 11, for example, after the special symbol process processing is completed. Transmitted.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S219, a winning random number value determination processing is executed (step S220). Thereafter, for example, by storing the storage address of the reserved storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the reserved storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Settings are made (step S221). The set storage notification command is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control processing of step S17 shown in FIG. Transmitted.

  The CPU 103 determines the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by, for example, confirming the state of a time reduction flag or a probable change flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 or the like as a winning random number value determination process (step S220). Is specified (step S401 in FIG. 15A). The CPU 103 specifies that the probable variable flag is on when the probable variable flag is on, specifies that the probable variable flag is off and the time reduction flag is on when it is on, and both the probable variable flag and the time reduction flag are off. Sometimes, it is sufficient to specify that the state is the normal state.

  Subsequent to the process of step S401, the starting port buffer value (“1” or “2”) or the current The special figure display result determination table data used for determining the special figure display result is selected according to the game state (step S402). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first special figure display result determination table 130A is set in the use table. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the second special figure display result determination table 130B is set in the use table. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step S217 of FIG. 14 is within a predetermined big hit determination range (step S403). In the big hit determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the special figure display result determination table data selected by the process of step S402 are set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and each It suffices if it is possible to determine the presence or absence of a determined value that matches the random number value MR1 by comparing the determined values one by one. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determined value included in the big hit determination range is set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number value MR1 and the minimum value or the maximum value of the big hit determination range. By comparison, it is sufficient that it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the big hit determination range. At this time, it is determined that the random number value MR1 is within the range of the big hit determination range, so that the variable display result based on the hold data including the random number value MR1 is determined to be "big hit" (big hit start determination). it can.

  When it is determined in step S403 that the random number value MR1 is not within the big hit determination range (step S403; No), it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (step S403). S404). The CPU 103 executes the same processing as in the case of the big hit determination range for the determined value assigned to the special figure display result of “small hit” in the special figure display result determination table data selected by the processing of step S402. Accordingly, it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the small hit determination range. When it is determined in step S404 that the variable display result is not within the small hit determination range (step S404; No), a symbol designating command corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” is sent to the effect control board 12. Settings for transmission are made (step S405).

  If it is determined in step S404 that it is within the small hit determination range (step S404; Yes), a symbol designation command corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is sent to the effect control board 12. Is set for transmission (step S407).

  If it is determined in step S403 that it is within the jackpot determination range (step S403; Yes), the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step S409). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special map (“first special map” corresponding to “1” or “second special diagram” corresponding to “2”) specified in correspondence with the starting port buffer value. The big hit type determination table data is selected from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table 131. Then, by referring to the selected big hit type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of big hit types is determined. The setting for transmitting the symbol designation command according to the determination result by the processing of step S409 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S410).

  After executing any one of the processes of steps S405, S407, and S410, a change category is determined (step S412). That is, the variation category is determined to one of the plurality of types shown in FIG. In the process of step S412, the CPU 103 determines a plurality of variable category determination tables stored in the ROM 101 (a plurality of types of variable categories that have different types of variable categories that can be determined in the variable category determination table and their respective determination ratios are different from each other). Table), one of the variable category determination tables to be set as the use table is selected.

  Specifically, the CPU 103 determines the special figure display result (for example, the determination result in step S403 or step S404) or the number of reserved storages (for example, the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154). One of the change category determination tables to be set as the use table is selected based on the stored value, such as the first reserved storage number count value. Subsequently, the CPU 103 converts the fluctuation category determination table set as the usage table and numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for fluctuation category determination extracted from, for example, the random number circuit 104 or the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154. Based on this, one of the plurality of types of fluctuation categories is determined.

  FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating a selection example of the variation category determination table. FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the fluctuation category determination table. The example of the configuration of the fluctuation category determination table is four types of fluctuation category tables referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of the fluctuation category. FIG. 17A is a configuration example (denoted as “C-TBL1” in the figure) of a fluctuation category determination table based on a certain fluctuation category determination table among the above four types. FIG. 17B is a configuration example of a fluctuation category determination table based on another fluctuation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL2” in the figure). FIG. 17C is a configuration example of a fluctuation category determination table based on still another fluctuation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL3” in the figure). FIG. 17C is a configuration example (denoted as “C-TBL4” in the figure) of a variation category determination table based on another variation category determination table. For the sake of simplicity, the variable category determination table in which the determination ratio is set as shown in FIG. 17A may be simply referred to as the variable category determination table in FIG. The same applies to FIGS. 17B to 17D and other determination tables such as the variation pattern determination table. FIG. 16 shows a selection example in which one of the four types (settings “C-TBL1” to “C-TBL4”) of FIGS. 17A to 17D is selected, ie, the above-described example. It is a selection example of selecting any one of the variable category determination tables from the four types of variable category determination tables.

  The fluctuation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 17A (the fluctuation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 17B, the fluctuation category determination table “C-TBL3” in FIG. 17C), and FIG. In the fluctuation category determination table “C-TBL4” in (D)), numerical values (determined values) to be compared with the random number value MR3 for fluctuation category determination are assigned to a plurality of types of fluctuation categories.

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 17A, 0 out of 100 determination values of the random number value MR3 (values in the range of “0” to “99”) are 0 70 pieces (values in the range of “0” to “69”) are assigned to “PA1” and 27 pieces (values in the range of “70” to “96”) are assigned to the variation category “PA2”. "PA3" is assigned, two (values in the range of "97" to "98") are assigned to the variation category "PA4", and one (value "99") is assigned to the variation category "PA5". I have. That is, in the setting example of the fluctuation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 17A, the fluctuation category “PA1” is 0% (0 ÷ 100), the fluctuation category “PA2” is 70% (70 ÷ 100), The variation category “PA3” is determined at a rate of 27% (27 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA4” is determined at a rate of 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PA5” is determined at a rate of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 17B, four (“0” to “99”) of the determined values of the random number value MR3 (“0” to “99”) are set. ”To“ 3 ”are assigned to the variation category“ PA1 ”, and 85 (values in the range“ 4 ”to“ 88 ”) are assigned to the variation category“ PA2 ”, and eight (“ 89 ”). ”To“ 96 ”are assigned to the variation category“ PA3 ”, and two (values in the range“ 97 ”to“ 98 ”) are assigned to the variation category“ PA4 ”and one (value“ 99 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA5 ”. That is, in the setting example of the fluctuation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 17B, the fluctuation category “PA1” is 4% (4 ÷ 100), the fluctuation category “PA2” is 85% (85 ÷ 100), The variation category “PA3” is determined at a rate of 8% (8 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA4” is determined at a rate of 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PA5” is determined at a rate of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” in FIG. 17C, 64 (“0” to “99”) out of 100 determined values of the random number value MR3 (values in the range of “0” to “99”). ”To“ 63 ”are assigned to the variation category“ PA1 ”, and 25 (values in the range“ 64 ”to“ 88 ”) are assigned to the variation category“ PA2 ”, and eight (“ 89 ”). ”To“ 96 ”are assigned to the variation category“ PA3 ”, and two (values in the range“ 97 ”to“ 98 ”) are assigned to the variation category“ PA4 ”and one (value“ 99 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA5 ”. That is, in the setting example of the fluctuation category determination table “C-TBL3” in FIG. 17C, the fluctuation category “PA1” is 64% (64 ÷ 100), the fluctuation category “PA2” is 25% (25 ÷ 100), The variation category “PA3” is determined at a rate of 8% (8 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA4” is determined at a rate of 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PA5” is determined at a rate of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the fluctuation category determination table “C-TBL4” in FIG. 17D, out of 100 determined values of the random number value MR3 (values in the range of “0” to “99”), 20 (“0”) ”To“ 19 ”are assigned to the variation category“ PB3 ”, and 40 (values in the range“ 20 ”to“ 59 ”) are assigned to the variation category“ PB4 ”, and 40 (“ 60 ”) are assigned to the variation category“ PB4 ”. ) To “99” are assigned to the fluctuation category “PB5”. That is, in the setting example of the fluctuation category determination table “C-TBL4” in FIG. 17D, the fluctuation category “PB3” is 20% (20 ÷ 100), the fluctuation category “PB4” is 40% (40 ÷ 100), The fluctuation category “PB5” is determined at a rate of 40% (40 ÷ 100).

  In the setting examples of FIGS. 17A to 17C, when the special figure display result is “losing”, when the number of reserved storages is large, shortening / non-reach ( (Loss) The determination ratio of the fluctuation category (the fluctuation category “PA1”) is increased. Specifically, the determination ratio “64%” of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” selected when the special figure display result is “Loss” and the number of retained storages is “4”. > The determination ratio "4%" of the variation category "PA1" in the variation category determination table "C-TBL2" selected when the special figure display result is "losing" and the number of retained storages is "3" or "2" > The determination ratio of the variable category "PA1" in the variable category determination table "C-TBL1" selected when the special figure display result is "losing" and the number of reserved storages is "1" is "0%".

  Also, in the setting examples of FIGS. 17A to 17C, when the special figure display result is “losing”, the variation category of the super reach (losing) (regardless of whether the number of retained storages is large or small) The determination ratio of the fluctuation category “PA4” or the fluctuation category “PA5” is fixed. Specifically, in any of the fluctuation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the fluctuation category determination table “C-TBL2”, and the fluctuation category determination table “C-TBL3”, the determination ratio of the fluctuation category “PA5” is “ 1% "and the determined ratio" 2% "of the fluctuation category" PA4 ".

  In the setting examples of FIGS. 17A to 17C, any of the fluctuation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the fluctuation category determination table “C-TBL2”, and the fluctuation category determination table “C-TBL3” is used. Even if there is, a determined value of the random number value MR3 corresponding to the same (common) fluctuation category (the same fluctuation category is determined) exists. That is, if the determined value of the random number value MR3 is a certain value, any one of the fluctuation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the fluctuation category determination table “C-TBL2”, and the fluctuation category determination table “C-TBL3” Also, the same fluctuation category is determined. For example, when the determined value of the random number value MR3 is “99”, any of the variable category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variable category determination table “C-TBL2”, and the variable category determination table “C-TBL3” Also, the variation category “PA5” is determined. Further, when the determined value of the random number value MR3 is a value in the range of “97” to “98”, the variation category “PA4” is determined in any of the variation category determination tables.

  When the determined value of the random number value MR3 is a value in the range of “89” to “96”, the variation category “PA3” is determined in any of the above-described variation category determination tables. When the determined value of the random number value MR3 is a value in the range of “64” to “69”, the variation category “PA2” is determined in any of the variation category determination tables. Thus, if the determined value of the random number value MR3 is a certain value (a value in each of the above ranges), it is determined in advance that the reach, the super reach, the super reach α and the super reach β are obtained. It can be easily determined. Therefore, prior to the variable display corresponding to the start winning prize, it is possible to notify them, and the interest in the game can be improved. In the setting examples of FIGS. 17A to 17C, when the determined value of the random number value MR3 is a value in the range of “0” to “69”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, In any of the fluctuation category determination table “C-TBL2” and the fluctuation category determination table “C-TBL3”, the fluctuation category “PA1” or “PA2” is determined. This makes it possible to easily determine at least that no reach is reached in advance.

  After that, in accordance with the determination result (determination result) by the process of step S412, the setting for transmitting any of the variation category commands shown in FIG. S413), the winning random number value determination processing ends.

  After executing the start winning determination processing in step S101 of FIG. 12, the CPU 103 selects any one of the processing of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. And run.

  The special symbol normal processing of step S110 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal processing, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" is determined (prior determination) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Done. In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance. The special symbol normal processing will be described later.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In the variation pattern setting process, a process of determining a variation pattern to one of a plurality of types shown in FIG. 5, a first variation start command (or a second variation start command), a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command For example, a transmission setting process for transmitting such information is included. When the variable pattern setting process is executed and the variable display of the special symbol is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”. The setting of the variation pattern will be described later.

  The special symbol change process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “2”. The special symbol change process includes a process for setting a special symbol to be changed in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to change. And the like. For example, every time the special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed, the special figure variation timer value, which is a value stored in the special figure variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153, is decremented by one or added by one. 1 is a first special figure game (a special figure game using the first special figure) by the special symbol display device 4A, or a second special figure game (a special figure game using the second special figure) by the second special symbol display apparatus 4B. Regardless of whether the game is a game, the elapsed time is measured by a common timer. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. As described above, the special symbol change process in step S112 may be a process of controlling the change of the special symbol in the first special figure game or the second special figure game by a common processing routine. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special figure change time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop processing in step S113 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop processing, the change of the special symbol is stopped by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and the fixed special symbol which is the variable display result of the special symbol is stopped (derived). The processing includes a setting for making the setting. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is turned on. If the big hit flag is turned on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. Is done. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the small hit flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit opening pre-processing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. The big hit opening pre-processing includes, for example, a process of starting a round in the big hit gaming state and opening the big winning opening based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit". include. At this time, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the special winning opening is opened may be set in accordance with whether the jackpot type is “non-probable”, “probable”, or “probable”. As an example, in response to the jackpot type of “non-probable change” or “probable change”, the upper limit of the period during which the special winning opening is opened is set to “29 seconds”, and the maximum number of times the round is executed is set. By setting the number of times of opening of the mouth to “15 times”, the setting of the normal opening big hit state may be performed. On the other hand, the upper limit of the period in which the special winning opening is opened is set to “0.1 seconds” in accordance with the jackpot type of “spot”, and the number of times the special winning opening is opened is the upper limit number of times the round is executed. May be set to "15 times" to set the short-term open jackpot state. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

  The big hit opening processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. The processing during the opening of the jackpot is based on a process of measuring the elapsed time from the opening of the jackpot, and on the basis of the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. For determining whether it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, the process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed, and then the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to “6”. .

  The post-big hit release processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". The post-big hit opening processing includes a process of determining whether or not the number of rounds in which the special winning opening is opened has reached the maximum winning opening opening number or the maximum winning opening opening number. In such a case, a process for setting for transmitting the jackpot end designation command is included. When the number of rounds has not reached the maximum winning opening number, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5". The value of the process flag is updated to “7”.

  The big hit end processing in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In the big hit end processing, a waiting time corresponding to a period during which an ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit gaming state is performed by the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, and the like. And a process of performing various settings for starting the probability change control and the time saving control in response to the end of the big hit game state. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The small hit release pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. The small hit opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to the open state in the small hit game state based on the variable display result being “small hit”. As an example, when the variable display result is "small hit", similarly to when the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "striking", the upper limit of the period in which the special winning opening is opened is set. The setting of the small hitting game state may be performed by setting “0.1 seconds” and setting the number of times of opening the special winning opening to “15 times”. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “9”.

  The small hit opening processing in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". The processing during opening of the small hits is a process of measuring the elapsed time from the opening of the special winning opening and the timing of returning the large winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not the event has occurred. When returning the special winning opening to the closed state, a process of stopping the supply of the drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door may be executed. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “10”.

  The small hit end processing in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. In the small hit ending process, the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, and the like stand by until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a directing operation for notifying the end of the small hitting game state is performed is performed. And the like. Here, when the small hitting game state ends, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hitting gaming state is continued without changing the state of the probability change flag or the time saving flag. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S110 in FIG. 12 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 18, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure hold storage number is “0” (step S231). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second special figure game is suspended. For example, in the process of step S231, the count value of the second reserved storage number stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be read, and it may be determined whether the read value is “0”.

  If the second special figure reserved storage number is other than “0” in step S231 (step S231; No), the reserved stored in the second special figure reserved storage unit 151B corresponding to the reserved number “1”. As the data, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type are read out (step S232). The numerical data read out at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the process in step S232, the second special figure reserved storage number is updated by subtracting one from the second reserved figure storage count, for example, and the second special figure reserved storage number is subtracted by one. The hold data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number “1” (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) are shifted upward by one entry by the unit 151B. (Step S233). In addition, in the process of step S233, the game control counter setting unit 154 may update the total reserved storage number count value stored in the total reserved storage number counter by one. At this time, the variable special figure designating buffer value, which is the value stored in the variable special figure designating buffer, is updated to "2" (step S234).

  When the second special figure reserved storage number is “0” in step S231 (step S231; Yes), it is determined whether the first special figure reserved storage number is “0” (step S235). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first special figure game is suspended. For example, in the process of step S235, the game control counter setting unit 154 reads the first hold storage number count value stored in the first hold storage number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is “0”. Just fine.

  As described above, since the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the second special figure reserved storage number is “0”, the first special figure game and the second special figure game are executed. When the figure game is suspended, the second special figure game is executed with priority over the first special figure game. The second special figure game is not limited to the mode executed prior to the first special figure game, and the game ball enters (passes) a start winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). ), And the special figure game (first special figure game, second special figure game) may be executed in the order in which the start prize (first start prize, second start prize) is generated. In this case, it is only necessary to provide a table for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the start winning prize has occurred, and determine whether to execute the first special figure game or the second special figure game from the stored data.

  If the number of first special figure reservation storage is other than “0” in step S235 (step S235; No), the reservation stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A corresponding to the reservation number “1”. Numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result and a random number value MR2 for determining a jackpot type are read out as data (step S236). The numerical data read out at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S236, the first special figure reserved storage number is updated by subtracting 1 from the first reserved figure storage count, and the first special figure reserved storage number is updated by subtracting one. The hold data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number “1” (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) are shifted upward by one entry by the unit 151A. (Step S237). In the process of step S237, the game control counter setting unit 154 may update the total reserved storage number count value stored in the total reserved storage number counter by one. At this time, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to "1" (step S238).

  After executing one of the processes of steps S234 and S238, the special table display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is used as a table for determining whether to be "big hit" or "losing". As in the process of step S402 shown in FIG. 15A, the special figure display result determination table data is selected (step S239). That is, in the process of step S402, the first special figure display result determination table 130A or the second special figure display result determination table 130B is set in the use table according to the starting port buffer value ("1" or "2"). In the process of step S239, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the first special figure display result determination table 130A is set in the use table, and the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2". In this case, the second special figure display result determination table 130B may be set in the use table. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is assigned to each of the special figure display results of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “losing”. It is determined whether the special figure display result is “big hit”, “small hit”, or “loss” by comparing with the value (step S240).

  After the special figure display result is determined in step S240, it is determined whether the special figure display result is "big hit" (step S241). If it is determined that the hit is a "big hit" (step S241; Yes), a big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to an on state (step S242). At this time, the big hit type determination table 131 is selected and set as a use table for determining the big hit type to one of a plurality of types (step S243). By referring to the jackpot type determination table 131 set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is converted into “non-probable”, “probable”, and “probable”. According to which of the determined values assigned to each of the jackpot types matches, it is determined which of the multiple jackpot types is to be set (step S244).

  In accordance with the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value which is a storage value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (step S245), the determined jackpot type Is stored. As an example, if the jackpot type is “non-probable”, the jackpot type buffer value is “0”, if “probable”, it is “1”, and if it is “probable”, it is “2”.

  If it is determined in step S241 that it is not "big hit" (step S241; No), it is determined whether or not the special map display result is "small hit" (step S246). Then, when it is determined that the small hit has occurred (step S246; Yes), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the ON state (step S247).

  If it is determined in step S246 that it is not "small hit" (step S246; No), or after executing one of the processes in steps S245 and S247, whether to control to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. A determined special symbol is set in accordance with the result of the pre-determination of whether or not, and further, the result of determining the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot game state (step S248).

  After setting the fixed special symbol in step S248, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S249), and the special symbol normal process ends. . If the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure is “0” in step S235 (step S235; Yes), a predetermined demonstration display setting is performed (step S250), and then a special symbol is set. The normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is sent from the main board 11 to effect control. It is determined whether or not transmission has been completed to the substrate 12. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demo display setting ends. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting ends.

  In the variation pattern setting process of step S111, the CPU 103 selects the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154. The numerical data indicating the random number value MR5 is extracted.

  Note that, as described above, when the determination value of the random number value MR3 corresponding to the same fluctuation category exists in each of the fluctuation category determination tables corresponding to the number of reserved storages, the random number MR3 corresponds to the same fluctuation category. When the random number value MR3 matching the determination value is extracted at the time of winning, when the winning random number value determination processing (step S220) is executed and when the fluctuation pattern setting processing (step S111) is executed, the number of retained storages is reduced. Even if they are greatly different, the same fluctuation category as that in the winning random number determination processing is determined in the fluctuation pattern setting processing. For example, in the above-described specific examples of the variation category determination tables “C-TBL1” to “C-TBL3”, if the random number value MR3 extracted at the time of winning is, for example, “99”, the winning is achieved irrespective of the number of stored memories. The variation category “PA5” is determined in both the time random value determination process and the variation pattern setting process. Further, if the random number value MR3 extracted at the time of winning is in the range of, for example, "97" to "98", the variable category "PA4" is obtained regardless of the number of retained storages in both the random number value determining process at winning and the variation pattern setting process. Is determined. In the process of step S261, it is preferable to determine the fluctuation category using the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation category stored as the pending data, but the CPU 103 newly generates the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation category. The variation category may be determined using the extracted and newly extracted variation category determination random number value MR3.

  Subsequently, the CPU 103 determines the fluctuation category using the newly extracted random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation category, as in step S412. That is, as shown in FIG. 16, based on the special figure display result and the number of reserved storages, a variable category determination table to be used is selected from the plurality of variable category determination tables shown in FIG. 17, and the selected variable category determination is performed. The variation category is determined based on the table and the random value MR3 for determining the variation category. Subsequently, the CPU 103 selects one of the plurality of variation pattern determination tables stored in the ROM 101, based on the variation category as the determination result, from among the plurality of variation pattern determination tables to be set as the use table. Subsequently, based on the fluctuation pattern determination table set as the use table and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR5 for determining the fluctuation pattern described above, the CPU 103 selects one of the plurality of types of fluctuation patterns. To determine.

  FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of the determination ratio of the variation pattern. It is assumed that the ROM 101 stores eight types of variation pattern determination tables corresponding to variation categories. FIG. 19A is a setting example of a variation pattern determination ratio by a variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA1 (shortened / non-reach loss)” among the above eight types. FIG. 19B is a setting example of a variation pattern determination ratio by a variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA2 (non-reach (loss))” among the above eight types. FIG. 19C is a setting example of a variation pattern determination ratio by a variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA3 (normal reach (loss))” among the above eight types. Hereinafter, the same applies to FIGS. 19D to 19H.

  As described above, in the main board 11, in the start winning determination processing in step S101, the transmission setting for transmitting the starting opening winning designation command corresponding to the starting opening buffer value to the effect control board 12 is performed ( (Step S219), transmission setting for transmitting a symbol designating command according to the special figure display result determined in Steps S403, S404, S409 and the like is performed (Steps S405, S407, S410), and determined in Step S412. Transmission setting for transmitting a fluctuation category command according to the fluctuation category is performed (step S413), and transmission setting for transmitting a pending storage number notification command is performed (step S221).

  After these processes are executed, by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 11, the game ball passes (enters) the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). When the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied, the start opening winning designation command (the first starting opening winning designation command or the second starting opening winning designation command), the symbol designation command, the fluctuation category command, and the notification of the number of stored storages are given. The four commands, ie, the command (the first storage number notification command or the second storage number notification command), are collectively transmitted as one set within one timer interrupt.

  Further, in the main board 11, in the special symbol normal process of step S110, a fixed special symbol which is a variable symbol display result of the special symbol by using the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the like. Is determined, and in the variation pattern setting process in step S111, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol is determined using the random value MR3 for determining the variation category, the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern, and the like.

Further, in the variation pattern setting process of step S111, a variable display result notification command for designating the determined special symbol determined as described above, a variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern of the decorative symbol determined as described above, and the like, Transmission setting for transmitting to the effect control board 12 is performed. After starting these processes, the variable display is started by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. Are sent together.
The command is not limited to the one transmitted in one timer interrupt, and the commands may be transmitted one by one by the command control process of step S17 for each timer interrupt.

  In other words, at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol or the decoration symbol is started, the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) is set to “big hit” or “small hit” in the special symbol normal process (step S110). It is determined whether or not to control the gaming state or the small hitting gaming state, and the variable pattern setting process (step S111) determines a specific variable display mode (variable pattern) of the decorative symbol. Is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Prior to this, at the timing when the game ball is detected in the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening), a “big hit” or a “big hit” is determined by a winning random number determination process (step S220). Judgment as to whether or not the game is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state as "small hit", the judgment of the roughly variable display mode (variable category) of the decorative symbol, and the like are performed, and are determined by respective effect control commands. The performed content is transmitted to the effect control board 12.

  Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described.

  In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and performs the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 20 starts, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12 The register setting of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit) is performed. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S72). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (Step S72; No), the process of Step S72 is repeatedly executed, and the process stands by.

  Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command or the like from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt inhibition. However, if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt inhibit state is used, an interrupt is generated. It is desirable to issue a prohibition command (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt processing, a control to be a production control command or the like is performed from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture the signal.

  The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command receiving buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194, for example. For example, when the effect control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt processing.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S72 (step S72; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S73), and a command analysis process is executed (step S74). In the command analysis processing executed in step S74, for example, after reading out various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and controls corresponding to the issued effect control commands are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S74, an error notification process, which is one of the error effects, is executed (step S75). In the error notification process of step S75, in response to the error designation command transmitted from the main board 11, an error image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an error sound output operation from the speaker 8, and an error in the lamp 9 are performed. Error notification or the like is performed by a light emitting operation or the like. Next, an effect control process is performed (step S76). In the effect control process processing in step S76, various effect devices such as an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speaker 8, a light emitting operation in the lamp 9, and a driving operation in the effect model. The determination, determination, setting, and the like according to the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 are performed on the control contents of the effect operation using the control.

  Following the effect control process of step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and the effect random number counted by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 as various random numbers used for effect control. Is updated by software. After that, the process returns to the step S72.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the processing executed in step S74 of FIG. 20 as the command analysis processing. In the command analysis processing shown in FIG. 21, first, the effect control CPU 120 checks the storage content of the effect control command receiving buffer to determine whether the received command transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 is received. It is determined whether or not there is (step S501). At this time, if there is no received command (Step S501; No), the command analysis processing ends.

  If there is a received command in step S501 (step S501; Yes), it is determined whether or not the received command is the first starting port winning designation command by checking the MODE data of the received command, for example. (Step S502). When the command is the first start-up opening prize designation command (step S502; Yes), the first hold storage number notification waiting time is set (step S503). For example, in the process of step S503, a timer initial value that is predetermined in correspondence with the reception waiting time of the first pending storage number notification command is set in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192. Just fine.

  If the received command is not the first starting opening winning designation command in step S502 (step S502; No), it is determined whether or not the receiving command is the second starting opening winning designation command (step S504). If the command is the second start-up winning designation command (step S504; Yes), the second waiting storage number notification waiting time is set (step S505). For example, in the process of step S505, a timer initial value that is set in advance corresponding to the reception waiting time of the second hold number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

  If the received command is not the second starting opening winning designation command in step S504 (step S504; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a symbol designation command (step S506). If the received command is not a symbol designating command in step S506 (step S506; No), it is determined whether the received command is a variable category command (step S507). If the received command is not the variable category command in step S507 (step S507; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is the first pending storage number notification command (step S508). If the command is the first pending storage number notification command (step S508; Yes), the first pending storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the clocking operation by the command reception control timer (step S509). .

  If the received command is not the first reserved storage number notification command in step S508 (step S508; No), it is determined whether the received command is the second reserved storage number notification command (step S510). If the command is the second reserved storage number notification command (step S510; Yes), the second reserved storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timekeeping operation by the command reception control timer (step S511). .

  If the received command is a symbol designating command in step S506 (step S506; Yes), if the received command is a variable category command in step S507 (step S507; Yes), or steps S503, S505, S509, S511 After executing any of the processes in step S503, if the first pending storage count notification waiting time is set in the process of step S503 for the received command received immediately before the received command, the received command is After storing at the beginning of the free area in the 1st start winning reception command buffer 194A (step S512), the process returns to step S501.

  If the received command is a symbol designation command in step S506 (step S506; Yes), if the received command is a variable category command in step S507 (step S507; Yes), or steps S503, S505, and S509 , After executing any of the processes of S511, if the second hold storage count notification waiting time is set in the process of step S503 for the received command received immediately before the received command, Is stored at the head of the empty area in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B (step S512), and the process returns to step S501.

  Note that when the first storage start number notification command is received together with the first change start command, the hold start number notification command may not be stored in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A. That is, it is only necessary that the effect control command received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the head of the free area in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A.

  In addition, when the second pending storage number notification command is received together with the second change start command, the pending storage number notification command may not be stored in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B. That is, it is only necessary that the effect control command received in response to the occurrence of the start winning prize can be sequentially stored from the head of the empty area in the second start winning time receiving command buffer 194B.

  If the received command is not the second pending storage number notification command in step S510 (step S510; No), the setting according to other received commands is performed (step S513), and the process returns to step S501. For example, when the received command is a game state designation command, the game state designation command is analyzed to identify the current game state. Further, for example, when the received command is a hit end designation command, the hit end designation command is analyzed to specify whether or not it is time saving.

  Starting opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), symbol designation command, variable category command, reserved storage number notification command (first reserved storage number notification command, second reserved storage number) An effect control command received from the main board 11 when a start winning is generated, as in the case of a notification command, is also referred to as a command at the time of starting winning. Further, the first reserved storage number notification command, the second reserved storage number notification command, the first startup opening winning designation command, and the second startup opening winning designation command are also referred to as reserved storage information. The symbol designation command and the fluctuation category command are also referred to as determination result information.

  When the received commands are sequentially stored from the head of the free area in the first start winning received command buffer 194A, it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designating command, a variable category command, or a first reserved storage number notification command. The received command may be stored without being distinguished, or each received command may be distinguished and stored at the head of a free area in the corresponding storage area.

  When sequentially storing the received commands from the head of the empty area in the second start winning received command buffer 194B, whether the received command is a symbol designation command, a variable category command, or a second reserved storage number notification command is determined. The received command may be stored without being distinguished, or each received command may be distinguished and stored at the head of a free area in the corresponding storage area.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process performed in step S76 of FIG. 20 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 22, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a winning effect effect determination process (step S150). FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S150 of FIG. 22 as a winning effect determination process.

  In the winning effect determination process shown in FIG. 23, the effect controlling CPU 120 first stores the contents stored in the start winning reception command buffer (the first start winning reception command buffer 194A or the second start winning reception command buffer 194B). A check is made (step S151), and it is determined whether or not a first start-up opening winning designation command has been received as a new reception command (step S152). If it is determined in step S152 that the first starting port winning designation command has not been received (step S152; No), the contents stored in the second starting winning reception command buffer 194B are checked (step S153), and a new one is received. It is determined whether or not the second start-up opening winning designation command has been received as a reception command (step S153). When it is determined in step S154 that the second start-up opening winning designation command has not been received (step S154; No), the winning effect determination processing ends.

If it is determined in step S152 that the first start-up opening winning designation command has been received (step S152; Yes), it is determined that the time is not shortened in the processing of step S513 in the command analysis processing of FIG. (Step S155: NO), the first pending effect determination process is executed (step S160). The first hold effect determination process includes a process of determining a display mode (also referred to as a display mode at the time of addition) of the hold display when additionally displaying the first start winning storage display area 5HL.
When a hold change effect or a hold change gasse effect is performed on the hold display when the additional display is made in the first start winning storage display area 5HL, whether the hold change effect or the hold change gase effect is to be executed in this step. It is sufficient to perform a process of determining whether or not to perform the holding effect, and a process of determining the execution timing of the holding effect when it is determined to execute the holding effect.

First, a determination process for determining the display mode of the hold display when the additional display is performed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL will be described.
FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display. It is assumed that the ROM 121 stores seven types of suspension display mode determination tables corresponding to the fluctuation categories. FIG. 24A shows a hold display mode selected when the change category is “PA1 (shortened / non-reach loss)” or the change category “PA2 (non-reach (loss)”) among the above seven types. It is a setting example (H-TBL1) of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the determination table. FIG. 24B is a setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the change category is “PA3 (normal reach (loss))” among the above seven types ( H-TBL2). FIG. 24C shows the setting of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the change category is “PA4 (super reach α (loss))” among the above seven types. It is an example (H-TBL3).

  FIG. 24D shows a setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the change category is “PA5 (super reach β (losing)”) among the above seven types. 24E shows the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the change category is “PB3 (normal reach (big hit)”) among the above seven types. 24 (F) is a setting example (H-TBL5) of the determination ratio of the mode, and FIG. 24 (G) is a setting example (H-TBL6) of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the display mode determination table. 22 is a setting example (H-TBL7) of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display according to the hold display mode determination table selected when “H.

  According to FIG. 24, for example, red and yellow are more likely to be determined when reaching, and blue and white (initial color) are more difficult to determine than when not reaching. Further, in the case of a reach, a hot reach (for example, a super reach) is more likely to determine red and yellow, and a blue and white are less likely to be determined than a non-hot reach (for example, normal reach). ing. Alternatively, according to FIG. 16, FIG. 17 and FIG. 24, when the special figure display result is “big hit”, red and yellow are more easily determined than when the special figure display result is “losing”, and blue and yellow It is difficult to determine the white color. In other words, in the display mode of red and yellow, the degree of expectation that a hot effect is executed and the degree of expectation of a big hit are higher than the display mode of blue and white. More specifically, the degree of expectation that a hot effect is executed and the degree of expectation of a big hit are increased in the order of red, yellow, blue, and white.

  That is, in the first suspension effect determination process (step S160), the effect control CPU 120 determines the plurality of suspension display modes shown in FIG. 24 based on the fluctuation category specified by the fluctuation category command transmitted from the main board 11. A hold display mode determination table to be used is selected from the determination table, and is added to the first start winning storage display area 5HL based on the selected hold display mode determination table and the random number value MR6 for determining the display mode of the hold display. The display mode (addition display mode) of the hold display to be displayed is determined.

  After executing the first reservation effect determination process (step S160), the production control CPU 120 stores the determination content of the first reservation effect determination process based on the determination result of the first reservation effect determination process (step S161). . Specifically, for example, the effect control CPU 120 sets the display mode of the hold display in the first hold effect determination process to the first start winning reception command buffer 194A corresponding to the first start winning buffer number corresponding to the first start winning buffer number. The determination content (display mode at the time of addition) of the first reservation effect determination process is stored in association with the buffer number of the prefetch notice buffer 194C.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the hold change effect in the first hold effect determination process, and when it is determined to execute the hold change effect, determines the content of the hold effect determination process (hold change effect). (The execution timing when executing the effect, the execution timing when executing the hold change gassing effect, the execution timing when executing the hold change), the first start winning reception command buffer 194A corresponding to the buffer number corresponding to the buffer number. In association with the buffer number of the 1-read-ahead notice buffer 194C, the content of the determination of the pending effect determination process (information (for example, a flag) indicating that the pending change effect is to be executed), Flag), information (for example, a flag) indicating that a pending change is to be performed, and a pending effect as a pending display of the target. Information specifying the changed hold display (that is, the hold display by the first start winning) (for example, the first look-ahead notice corresponding to the buffer number of the first start winning in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A). Buffer number of the buffer 194C).

  In this case, for example, in the first hold effect determination process at the time of the first start winning of the third special figure hold storage number, the additional display mode “white”, the hold effect “executed (hold change effect executed)” If the execution timing is determined as “next fluctuation”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the buffer number of the first start winning in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A (for example, the buffer number “3”). ) Is stored in association with the buffer number (buffer number “3”) of the first prefetch notice buffer 194 </ b> C corresponding to the first prefetch notice buffer 194 </ b> C, and the second display mode corresponding to the execution timing “next variation” is stored. The buffer number (buffer number) of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number (buffer number “1”) in the 1 start winning reception command buffer 194A. It may be stored and "1") information and buffer number '3' indicating running held change effect in association with the.

  In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the hold change effect in the first hold effect determination process, the buffer in the first start winning winning reception command buffer 194A corresponding to the execution timing of the first hold effect determination process. Only information for specifying the target hold display (hold display by the first start winning) may be stored in association with the buffer number of the first look-ahead notice buffer 194C corresponding to the number (execute the hold change effect). The information indicating that the operation is performed may not be stored.)

  After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 determines the display mode of the hold display determined in the first hold effect determination process (step S160) (the first start winning in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A). The first start-up prize storage display area 5HL adds a new hold display based on the additional display mode stored in association with the buffer number of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C. A suspension addition process is executed (step S162). More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first startup winning storage display area 5HL to display a hold display in the additional display mode stored in association with the buffer number of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C described above. By setting the control pattern as a use pattern and transmitting a display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, the first suspension effect The hold display in the additional display mode determined in the determination process is added to the first start winning storage display area 5HL. Then, the prize-winning effect determination process ends.

In step S154, it is determined that the second starting opening winning designation command has been received (step S154; Yes), and when it is determined that the time is reduced in the processing of step S513 in the command analysis processing of FIG. 21 ( Step S156: YES), execute the second pending effect determination processing (step S163). The second hold effect determination process includes a process of determining a display mode (also referred to as a display mode at the time of addition) of the hold display when the additional display is performed in the second start winning storage display area 5HR.
In addition, when a hold change effect or a hold change gasse effect is performed on the hold display when the additional display is made in the second start winning storage display area 5HR, whether the hold change effect or the hold change gase effect is to be executed in the step. It is sufficient to perform a process of determining whether or not to perform the holding effect, and a process of determining the execution timing of the holding effect when it is determined to execute the holding effect.

  In addition, each processing of step S163, step S164, and step S165 related to the second starting opening winning is the same as the processing related to each processing of step S160, step S161, and step S162 related to the first starting opening winning, Since “first” in each step can be replaced with “second”, and the code can be replaced in accordance with the replacement, the description is omitted.

  It is determined in step S152 that the first startup opening winning designation command has been received (step S152; Yes), and it is specified that the time is reduced in the processing of step S513 in the command analysis processing of FIG. 21 (step S152). S155: YES), the production control CPU 120 determines the display mode of the first hold display to be additionally displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL to the initial color (white), and receives the first start winning reception buffer 194A. The first hold display in white display mode is added to the first start winning storage display area 5HL in association with the same buffer number as the buffer number corresponding to the storage content in (Step S166). Then, the prize-winning effect determination process ends.

  In addition, it is determined in step S154 that the second starting opening winning designation command has been received (step S154; Yes), and it is specified that the time is not shortened in the processing of step S513 in the command analysis processing of FIG. (Step S156: YES), production control CPU 120 determines the display mode of the second hold display to be additionally displayed in second start winning storage display area 5HR to the normal display (white ball), and at the time of the second start winning. In association with the same buffer number as the buffer number corresponding to the storage content in the reception command buffer 194B, the second hold display in the display mode of the normal display (white ball) is added to the second start winning storage display area 5HR. (Step S166). Then, the prize-winning effect determination process ends.

  After executing the winning effect determination processing in step S150 shown in FIG. 22 and FIG. One of the processes of 177 is selected and executed.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” which is the initial value. The variable display start waiting process is performed based on whether or not the first variation start command (or the second variation start command), the variation pattern designation command, the variable display result notification command, and the like transmitted from the main board 11 are received. The processing includes determining whether to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the display device 5 or the like. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display start setting processing is performed in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to perform variable display and various other staging operations, a process of determining a fixed decorative symbol according to a variation pattern of a special symbol, a type of display result, etc., and shifting a first hold display or a second hold display to activate A process of displaying a special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the first hold display or the second hold display in the display area AHA, various effects, and effect modes of various effects (for example, an active display which is a main notice effect) A change effect, and a process of determining the active display change effect). After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern based on the effect control pattern determined in the variable display start setting processing in accordance with the timer value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192. Then, various kinds of control data are read out, and various effect controls (for example, variable display control of decorative symbols during variable display of decorative symbols) are performed. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 controls the video signal (effect image) to be output to the image display device 5 and displayed on the screen based on the read control data, and outputs the effect sound signal to the audio control board 13. Various kinds of effect control such as control to output effect sound from the speaker 8 and output of an illumination signal to the lamp control board 14 to turn on / off / blink the lamp 9 are executed.

  After performing such an effect control, for example, when an end code indicating the end of variable display of a decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or when a symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, Then, the fixed decorative symbol as the final stop symbol which is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is completely stopped and displayed. If the final decorative symbol is completely stopped and displayed in response to the end code being read from the effect control pattern, the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command has elapsed. Also, without depending on the effect control command from the main board 11, the effect control board 12 can autonomously derive and display the determined decorative symbol and determine the variable display result. When the fixed decoration symbol is completely stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The waiting process per special figure in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting processing, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from main board 11 has been received. Then, when the hit start designation command is received, if the hit start designation command designates the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to “6” corresponding to the big hit medium effect process. Update to On the other hand, when the hit start designation command is received, if the hit start designation command designates the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. Is updated to “4”. Also, when the effect control process timer times out without receiving the hit start designation command, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is "losing", and the value of the effect process flag is the initial value. Update to "0".

  The small hit production process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is “4”. In the small hit effect production process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, reads out various control data based on the set contents, and proceeds to step S172. As in the variable display effect processing, various effect controls in the small hitting game state are executed by outputting a video signal, an effect sound signal, an illumination signal, and the like. In the small hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a hit end designation command from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is updated to “5” which is a value corresponding to the small hit end production. .

  The small hit end effect processing in step S175 is processing executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In the small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hitting game state, reads out various control data based on the set contents, and executes step S172. Similar to the variable display effect processing, various effect controls are performed at the end of the small hitting game state by outputting a video signal, an effect sound signal, an illumination signal, and the like. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”.

  The big hit production process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is “6”. In this big hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, a production control pattern corresponding to the production contents in the big hit game state, reads out various control data based on the set contents, and variably displays in step S172. Similarly to the medium effect processing, various effect controls in the big hit game state are executed by outputting a video signal, an effect sound signal, an illumination signal, and the like. In addition, in the big hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving the hit end designation command from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is updated to “7” which is a value corresponding to the ending production process.

  The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In the ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit game state, reads out various control data based on the set contents, and performs variable display in step S172. Similarly to the effect processing, various effect controls at the end of the big hit game state are executed by outputting a video signal, an effect sound signal, an illumination signal, and the like. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S171 in FIG. 22 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 25, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and determines that the special figure display result is “losing”. It is determined whether or not it becomes (step S522). When it is determined that the special figure display result is “losing” (step S522; Yes), the specified fluctuation pattern is read, for example, by reading the EXT data in the fluctuation pattern specification command transmitted from the main board 11. Is a non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” (that is, “PA1-1”, “PA2-1”, “PA2-2”, and “PA2-3” in FIG. 5). It is determined whether or not there is (step S523).

  When it is determined in step S523 that the pattern is the non-reach variation pattern (step S523; Yes), the combination of the fixed decorative symbols that are the final stop symbols constituting the non-reach combination is determined (step S524). As an example, in the process of step S524, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a left decided symbol, which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193, is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to the predetermined left determined symbol determination table or the like, the left determined decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L in the display area of the image display device 5 among the determined decorative symbols is determined.

  Next, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a right determined symbol which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined right determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. And the like, the right determined decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 among the determined decorative symbols is determined. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determining table or the like. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a medium-fixed symbol which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined medium-fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. And the like, among the determined decorative symbols, the middle determined decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. In the process of step S524, a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination serving as a predetermined chance symbol may be determined in response to the case where the variable symbol preview is being executed.

  If it is determined in step S523 that the pattern is not the non-reach variation pattern (step S523; No), a combination of the final decorative symbols constituting the reach combination is determined (step S525). As an example, in the process of step S525, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining left and right fixed symbols updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. For example, by referring to the predetermined left and right fixed symbol determination table, the fixed decorative symbols are stopped and displayed together in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the display area of the image display device 5. To determine a decorative symbol having the same symbol number. Further, it extracts numerical data indicating a random value for determining a medium-determined symbol which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193, and reads a predetermined medium-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to the determined decorative design, the middle fixed decorative design that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative design display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined.

  Here, for example, in the case where the finalized decorative symbol is a big hit combination, such as when the symbol number of the middle finalized decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left finalized decorative symbol and the right finalized decorative symbol, an arbitrary value By adding or subtracting (for example, “1”) to or from the symbol number of the medium determined decorative symbol, the determined decorative symbol may be a reach combination instead of a jackpot combination. Alternatively, when determining the middle fixed decoration symbol, the difference (symbol difference) between the left fixed decoration symbol and the right fixed decoration symbol with the symbol number may be determined, and the middle fixed decoration symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. .

  When it is determined in step S522 that the special figure display result is not “losing” (step S522; No), the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable”, or It is determined whether the result is “small hit” or other cases (step S526). If it is determined to be "striking" or "small hit" (step S526; Yes), the final decoration will be the final stop symbol corresponding to the case of "slipping" or "small hit", for example, the opening chance. The combination of symbols is determined (step S527). In this case, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a chance eye updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined chance eye determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. , Etc., the combination of the determined decorative symbols constituting any of the opening chances may be determined.

  If it is determined in step S526 that it is "non-probable" or "probable" other than "probable" or "small hit" (step S526; No), the final decorative symbol which is the final stop symbol constituting the big hit combination is determined. The combination is determined (step S528). As an example, in the process of step S528, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a jackpot determined symbol, which is updated by a random counter or the like of the effect control counter setting unit 193, is extracted, and subsequently stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined big hit fixed symbol determination table, the display is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" on the screen of the image display device 5. A decorative symbol having the same symbol number is determined. At this time, depending on whether the jackpot type is “non-probable change” or “probable change”, or whether or not there is a promotion effect during the big hit, a determination is made that a different decorative symbol is determined as a fixed decorative symbol. Good.

  As a specific example, when the jackpot type is “non-probable change”, any one of a plurality of types of normal symbols is selected to be determined as a fixed decorative pattern constituting a non-probable change big hit combination. Just fine. When the jackpot type is “probable”, any one of a plurality of types of normal symbols or probable symbols is selected to form a non-probable variable winning combination or a probable variable winning combination. Should be determined. At this time, if the non-probable variable jackpot combination is determined to be the final decorative symbol, the notification that the probable state is controlled in the re-lottery effect during the variable display is not performed, and the process is executed in accordance with the jackpot gaming state. What is necessary is just to be notified that the state is controlled to be in the probable change state by a jackpot promotion promotion or the like. On the other hand, when the determined decorative symbol of the probable change big hit combination is determined, the fact that the state is controlled to the probable change state is performed in the re-lottery effect during the variable display or without executing the re-lottery effect.

  If it is specified that the time is not shortened in the processing of step S513 in the command analysis processing of FIG. 21 (step S155: NO), after executing any of the processing of steps S524, S525, S527, and S528, the processing is suspended. The processing is executed (step S531). Specifically, an active display corresponding to the change is displayed in the active display area AHA (in other words, a special image including the active display corresponding to the change is displayed). For example, when the variation of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the first special figure game (when the variable display of the current decorative symbol is linked to the first special figure game), the first start winning storage display area. An active display corresponding to the hold display displayed on the right end of the 5HL is displayed in the active display area AHA (a special image including an active display corresponding to the hold display displayed on the right end of the first start winning storage display area 5HL). Is displayed). More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 moves the active display corresponding to the hold display displayed on the right end of the first start winning storage display area 5HL to the active display area AHA to display the active display. Is set as a use pattern, and a display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. An active display corresponding to the hold display displayed on the right end of area 5HL is displayed in active display area AHA. The active display in the active display area AHA may be displayed in the same manner as the hold display, or may be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the hold display but different from the hold display. The same applies to the case where the change of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the second special figure game.

  Further, in the processing of step S531, the effect control CPU 120, when there is a hold display in addition to the held hold display (active display) in the first startup winning storage display area 5HL, displays the other hold display in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. In the start winning prize storage display area 5HL, when there is a hold display in addition to the active display in the second start prize storage display area 5HR, the other hold display is shifted in the second start prize storage display area 5HR.

  After executing the processing of step S531, the effect execution setting processing is executed (step S532). The effect execution setting process includes a process of determining whether or not to execute an active display change effect for the active display corresponding to the change, a process of determining a type of the active display change effect at the time of execution, and an active process at the time of execution. The processing includes a process of determining an effect mode of a display change effect, a process of determining an execution timing of an active display change effect at the time of execution, and a process of setting (or resetting) an effect control pattern based on a result of these determinations. Have been. Details will be described later.

  After executing the processing of step S532, the execution setting of the effect during other variable display is performed (step S533). As an example, in the process of step S533, the execution setting of "one-shot notification effect" for immediately notifying (conclusively notifying) that the variable display result becomes "big hit" by the big hit notification sound or the big hit notification light emission is performed. You may. Examples of the jackpot notification sound include an alarm sound, a chime sound, and a siren sound. An example of the big hit notification light emission is light emission of a flash lamp constituting the light emitting member 9CC. Further, in the process of step S533, regardless of whether or not the variable display result is "big hit", for example, it may be set so that an effect of a predetermined mode is executed for liveliness. For example, it may be set so that an effect in which the predetermined lamp 9 (for example, the light emitting members 9SL and 9SR) emits light is executed.

  After executing the processing of step S533, an initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 is set, for example, corresponding to the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command (step S534). . Subsequently, a variable display etc. start setting process for setting a variable symbol or the like to start changing in the image display device 5 is executed (step S535). For example, image display is performed by transmitting a display control command specified by display control data included in the effect control pattern set as a use pattern in the effect execution setting process of step S532 to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, or the like. The sound on the speaker 8 is transmitted by transmitting the setting for starting the change of the decorative design on the screen of the device 5 and the effect sound signal specified by the sound control data included in the effect control pattern to the sound control board 13. The setting for starting the output and the setting for starting the light emission of the lamp 9 by, for example, transmitting the illumination signal specified by the lamp control data included in the effect control pattern to the lamp control board 14 are performed. .

  After executing the processing of step S535, the command stored in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A or the second start winning reception command buffer 194B is digested (step S536). Specifically, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the first special figure game, the effect control CPU 120 determines the most effective command among the commands associated with the first start winning reception command buffer 194A. The command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the small buffer number is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (first starting port winning designation) is deleted. The command associated with the command is shifted while maintaining the winning order.When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the second special figure game, the command is stored in the second start winning reception command buffer. Command (1 set) stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands The command stored in the area corresponding to the larger buffer number than the buffer number of the divided commands shifts while maintaining the winning order.

  In the process of step S536, the information stored in the first prefetch notice buffer 194C or the second prefetch notice buffer 194D provided in the RAM 122 or the like is also deleted or shifted in accordance with the deletion or shift of the command. . After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S537), and the variable display start setting process ends.

Here, the effect execution setting process (step S532) will be described in detail. First, a process of determining whether or not to execute an active display change effect for an active display corresponding to the change, and a process of determining the type of active display change effect when it is determined to execute the active display change effect (which active The process of determining whether to execute the display change effect) will be described.
FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of the determination ratio by the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table.
The setting example indicates whether or not the active display change effect is to be executed and the type of the active display change effect (which active display change effect is to be executed). It is a setting example.
In the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table, numerical values (decision values) to be compared with the random number value MR7 (not shown) for determining whether or not to execute the active display change effect are “executed” and “not executed”. Are assigned at a determined ratio as shown in FIG. Further, in the “executed” of the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number value MR7 for determination (not shown) includes “first system change effect” and “ Each of the "second system change effect" and the "first system change effect and the second system change effect" is assigned with a determination ratio as shown in FIG. In addition, the first system change effect includes a plurality of types of effect modes with similar effect modes. The second system change effect includes a plurality of types of effect modes with similar effect modes. Specifically, the first system change effect is an effect that affects the display mode of the active display, and the second system change effect is an effect that operates on the display mode of the active display frame. The target that acts in the second system change effect is different.

  Note that “executed” and “first system change effect” indicate that the first system change effect is performed as an active display change effect, and “executed” and “second system change effect” indicate that the second system change effect is performed. The “active” and “first system change effect and second system change effect” indicate that the effect is performed as an active display change effect, and “active display change effect” indicates both the first system change effect and the second system change effect. Indicates that it will be performed as an effect. "No execution" indicates that the active display change effect is not performed. Further, the variation pattern 1-X represents the variation pattern PA1-1 shown in FIG. 5, and the variation pattern PA2-X represents one of the variation patterns PA2-1, PA2-2, and PA2-3 shown in FIG. , The variation pattern PA3-X represents one of the variation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 shown in FIG. 5, and the variation pattern PA4 is the variation pattern PA4-1, PA4-2, PA4-3, Represents any of PA4-4. The same applies to the variation patterns PA5-X, PB4-X, and PB5-X.

  According to FIG. 26, when the variation pattern (variable display pattern) of the variation (variable display) designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation patterns PA1-X and PA2-X, "No execution" is set to 100. %, Indicating that neither the first system change effect nor the second system change effect is executed. That is, when the fluctuation is non-reach (loss), it indicates that the active display change effect is not executed.

  Further, when the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is the fluctuation pattern PB3-X, PB4-X, PB5-X, the fluctuation pattern is PA3-X, PA4-X, PA5-X. Compared with a certain case, the ratio of “no execution” is determined to be lower. That is, the ratio at which the active display change effect is executed when the change becomes “big hit” is higher than the ratio at which the active display change effect is executed when the change becomes “losing”. That is, when the active display change effect is executed, the degree of expectation of "big hit" is higher than when the active display change effect is not executed.

  Further, when the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is the fluctuation pattern PB3-X, PB4-X, PB5-X, the fluctuation pattern is PA3-X, PA4-X, PA5-X. Compared with the case, the ratio of “1st system change effect and 2nd system change effect” when “execution existence” is determined is higher. For example, in the case of the variation pattern PB3-X, the ratio of the “first system change effect and the second system change effect” determined when “executed” is determined is about 57% (40 ÷ 70). On the other hand, in the case of the variation pattern PA3-X, the ratio of the “first system change effect and the second system change effect” determined when “execution is determined” is about 33% (10 ％ 30). It is. Or, more specifically, whether the variation pattern of the variation designated by the variation pattern designation command is any of the variation patterns PA3-X to PA5-X or any of the variation patterns PB3-X to PB5-X. The difference (or ratio) of the ratio at which the “first system change effect and the second system change effect” is determined by the change pattern of the change specified by the change pattern designation command is the change pattern PA3-X to PA5- It is larger than the difference between the ratios at which the “first system change effect” or the “second system change effect” is determined depending on which of X and the change pattern PB3-X to PB5-X. For example, when the variation pattern is PB3-X, the ratio at which the “first system change effect and the second system change effect” are determined and when the change pattern is PA3-X, “the first system change effect and the second system change effect” The difference between the ratio at which the “effect” is determined is 30% (40% −10%), while the ratio at which the “first system change effect” is determined and the variation pattern when the variation pattern is PB3-X. The difference from the rate at which the “first system change effect” is determined when PA3-X is 5% (15% −10%). That is, when the first system change effect and the second system change effect are executed, the degree of expectation of “big hit” is higher than when the first system change effect is not performed.

  When the variation pattern of the variation specified by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern PA4-X, PA5-X, PB4-X, or PB5-X, the variation pattern is PA3-X or PB3-X. Compared with the case, the ratio of “no execution” is determined to be lower. That is, the ratio at which the active display change effect is executed when the change reaches the super reach is higher than the ratio at which the active display change effect is executed when the change reaches the normal reach. That is, when the active display change effect is executed, the degree of expectation of super reach is higher than when the active display change effect is not executed.

  Similarly, when the first system change effect and the second system change effect are executed, the degree of expectation of super reach is higher than when the first system change effect is not performed.

  That is, in the effect execution setting process (step S532), the effect control CPU 120 is designated by the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table, the random number value MR7 for determining whether to execute the active display change effect, and the fluctuation pattern designation command. Whether or not to execute the active display change effect is determined by the change pattern (variable display pattern) of the change (the variable display). When the active display change effect is executed, a plurality of active display change effects are produced. Which active display change effect is to be executed is determined.

  The effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the active display change effect is to be executed, and when it is determined to be “executed”, the “first system change effect”, the “second system change effect”, or the “first system change effect”. And second system change effect "may be determined.

Next, a description will be given of a process of determining an effect mode of an active display change effect to be executed in the case of an active display (fluctuation) in which an active display change effect is executed.
FIG. 27A is a diagram illustrating a setting example of a determination ratio of an effect mode of the first system change effect when the first system change effect is executed as the active display change effect. FIG. 27B is a diagram illustrating a setting example of the determination ratio of the effect form of the second system change effect when the second system change effect is executed as the active display change effect. FIG. 27 (C) shows the determination ratio of the effect form of the first system change effect and the second system change effect when both the first system change effect and the second system change effect are executed as the active display change effect. It is a figure showing an example of a setting.

  In the illustrated example, the fluctuation pattern 1-X represents the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 shown in FIG. 5, and the fluctuation pattern PA2-X is any of the fluctuation patterns PA2-1, PA2-2, and PA2-3 shown in FIG. The variation pattern PA3-X represents one of the variation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 shown in FIG. 5, and the variation pattern PA4 is the variation pattern PA4-1, PA4-2, PA4 shown in FIG. -3 and PA4-4. The same applies to the variation patterns PA5-X, PB4-X, and PB5-X.

  It is assumed that the ROM 121 stores the active display change effect patterns as the effect types of the four types of first system change effects according to the 24 types of change patterns shown in FIG. It is also assumed that the ROM 21 stores the active display change effect patterns as the effect types of the three types of second system change effects according to the 24 types of change patterns shown in FIG. Also, the ROM 21 stores 12 types of active display change effect patterns as the effect types of the first system change effect and the second system change effect according to the 24 types of change patterns shown in FIG. I do.

The first system change effect is an effect effect that stimulates a change in the display mode of the active display for the active display, and is, for example, an effect effect that stimulates a change in the display shape of the active display.
In FIG. 27A, assuming that the display shape of the active display corresponding to the change is “sphere” as the default, the active display change effect pattern “BP1” has a display shape of “sphere”. This is an effect pattern of a failed effect (active display change gassing effect) that is not changed as it is. According to the illustrated example, when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach), the determination ratio is higher than when the reach is hot (for example, super reach). Further, when the variation pattern is “losing” (for example, variation pattern PA3-1), the determination ratio is higher than the variation pattern that is “big hit” (for example, variation pattern PB3-1).

  The active display change effect pattern “BP2” is an effect of a successful effect of changing the display shape of the active display corresponding to the change from the default display shape of “sphere” to the display shape of the active display of “triangle”. It is a pattern. According to the illustrated example, when the variation pattern is “losing” (for example, the variation pattern PA4-1), the determination rate is smaller than the variation pattern (for example, the variation pattern PB4-1) that is “big hit”. Is getting higher. In addition, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the determination ratio is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach).

  The active display change effect pattern “BP3” is a successful effect effect that changes the display shape of the active display corresponding to the change from the default display shape of “sphere” to the display shape of the active display of “pentagon”. It is a pattern. According to the example shown in the drawing, when the fluctuation pattern is “big hit” (for example, the fluctuation pattern PB3-1), the determination ratio is smaller than the fluctuation pattern (for example, the fluctuation pattern PA3-1) that is “losing”. Is getting higher. In addition, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the determination ratio is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach).

  The active display change effect pattern “BP4” is a successful effect effect in which the display shape of the active display corresponding to the change is changed from the default display shape of “sphere” to the active display of “star”. It is a pattern. According to the illustrated example, the determination ratio is higher when the reach is hot (for example, super reach) than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach). Further, when the variation pattern is “big hit” (for example, variation pattern PB5-1), the determination ratio is higher than the variation pattern (for example, variation pattern PA5-1) that is “losing”.

The second system change effect is an effect effect that stimulates a change in the display mode of the active display frame for the active display frame, and is, for example, an effect effect that stimulates a change in the thickness of the line of the active display frame.
In FIG. 27 (B), the active display change effect pattern “CP1” is, as a default, assuming that the line thickness of the active display frame surrounding the active display corresponding to the change is “normal”. This is an effect pattern of a failed effect (active display change gassing effect) that does not change the thickness of the line as “normal”. According to the illustrated example, when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach), the determination ratio is higher than when the reach is hot (for example, super reach). Further, when the variation pattern is “losing” (for example, variation pattern PA3-1), the determination ratio is higher than the variation pattern that is “big hit” (for example, variation pattern PB3-1).

  The active display change effect pattern “CP2” is a successful effect effect pattern in which the line thickness of the active display frame surrounding the active display is changed from “normal” to “medium thick”. According to the illustrated example, when the variation pattern is “losing” (for example, the variation pattern PA4-1), the determination rate is smaller than the variation pattern (for example, the variation pattern PB4-1) that is “big hit”. Is getting higher. In addition, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the determination ratio is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach).

  The active display change effect pattern “CP3” is a successful effect effect pattern in which the line thickness of the active display frame surrounding the active display corresponding to the change is changed from “normal” to “extremely thick”. According to the example shown in the drawing, when the fluctuation pattern is “big hit” (for example, the fluctuation pattern PB3-1), the determination ratio is smaller than the fluctuation pattern (for example, the fluctuation pattern PA3-1) that is “losing”. Is getting higher. In addition, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the determination ratio is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach).

The first system change effect and the second system change effect include an effect effect of inciting a change in the display mode of the active display by the above-described first system change effect, and an active display surrounding the active display by the above-described second system change effect. This is an effect effect that performs both of the effect effect that fuels a change in the display mode of the frame.
In FIG. 27 (C), the active display change effect pattern “AP1” has, as a default, a display shape of the active display corresponding to the change of “sphere” and a line thickness of an active display frame surrounding the active display. Is "Normal", a failure effect (active display change gassing effect) in which the display shape of the active display remains "Sphere" and the line thickness of the active display frame does not change to "Normal" It is a pattern. According to the illustrated example, when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach), the determination ratio is higher than when the reach is hot (for example, super reach). Further, when the variation pattern is “losing” (for example, variation pattern PA3-1), the determination ratio is higher than the variation pattern that is “big hit” (for example, variation pattern PB3-1).

  Further, the active display change effect pattern “AP2” succeeds in changing the line shape of the active display frame surrounding the active display from “normal” to “medium” while keeping the display shape of the active display as “sphere”. This is the production pattern of the production. According to the illustrated example, when the variation pattern is “losing” (for example, the variation pattern PA4-1), the determination rate is smaller than the variation pattern (for example, the variation pattern PB4-1) that is “big hit”. Is getting higher. Also, when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach), the determination ratio is higher than when the reach is thermal (for example, super reach).

  The active display change rendering pattern “AP3” is a successful rendering in which the display shape of the active display remains “sphere” and the line thickness of the active display frame surrounding the active display is changed from “normal” to “extremely thick”. It is an effect pattern. When the variation pattern is “big hit” (for example, variation pattern PB3-1), the determination ratio is higher than the variation pattern (for example, variation pattern PA3-1) that is “losing”. In addition, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the determination ratio is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach).

  The active display change effect pattern “AP4” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “triangle” and the line thickness of the active display frame is not changed as “normal”. The effect pattern “AP5” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “triangle”, and the thickness of the line of the active display frame is changed to “medium”, and the active display change effect pattern “ “AP6” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “triangle” and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to “extreme”.

  The active display change rendering pattern “AP7” is a rendering pattern of a rendering mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “pentagon” and the line thickness of the active display frame is not changed as “normal”. The display change effect pattern “AP8” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “pentagon” and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to “medium thickness”. The pattern “AP9” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “pentagon” and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to “extremely thick”.

  The active display change rendering pattern “AP10” is a rendering pattern of a rendering mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “star” and the line thickness of the active display frame is not changed as “normal”. The display change effect pattern “AP11” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “star”, and the thickness of the line of the active display frame is changed to “medium thickness”. The pattern “AP12” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “star” and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to “extremely thick”.

  That is, in the effect execution setting process (step S532), the effect control CPU 120 determines the random number value MR8 for determining the active display change effect pattern and the variation pattern (the variable display) of the variation (variable display) designated by the variation pattern designation command. (Variable display pattern), the active display change effect pattern is determined as the effect mode of the active display change effect when the active display change effect is executed.

Next, a process for determining the timing of executing the active display change effect in the fluctuation will be described.
FIG. 28 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of the determination ratio by the effect execution timing determination table when the first system change effect is executed.
The ROM 121 stores a plurality of (for example, four) execution timings of the first system change effect according to the 24 types of variation patterns shown in FIG. 5 as the effect execution timings of the first system change effect. And
The timing 1 is, for example, a timing at which the first system change effect is executed at the start of the change of the change, the timing 2 is a timing at which the first system change effect is executed at the time of the pseudo continuous change, and the timing 3 is, The timing at which the first system change effect is executed when the reach in the change is established, and the timing 4 is the timing at which the first system change effect is executed after the reach in the change is established (during the reach). The pseudo continuous change is, for example, when the variable display during the change is temporarily stopped.

  In addition, the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 classified as “success expectation degree“ small ”” indicate that the expectation degree at which the success effect is executed is “small”, and “success expectation degree“ medium ””. Of the variation patterns PA4-1 to PA4-4 and PA5-1 to PA5-4, the degree of expectation that a successful performance is executed is "medium" higher than the above degree of expectation of success "small" Represents Further, the fluctuation patterns PB3-1 and PB3-2 classified as “success expectation“ large ”” indicate that the expectation at which the success effect is executed is “large” which is higher than the success expectation “medium”. In the variation patterns PB4-1 to PB4-4 and PB5-1 to PB5-4, which are classified into “success expectation“ maximum ”, the expectation at which the success effect is executed is the above-mentioned success expectation“ large ”. Higher than "maximum".

  Specifically, in FIG. 27, the variation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 are active display change effect patterns BP1 which are failure effects of the first system change effect, and active displays which are failure effects of the second system change effect. The ratio determined for the change effect pattern CP1 and the active display change effect pattern AP1 which is the failure effect of the first system change effect and the second system change effect is compared with the ratio determined for the other active display change effect patterns. The degree of success is high, and the degree of success expectation at which a successful effect can be executed is low.

  In FIG. 27, the variation patterns PA4-1 to PA4-4, PA5-1 to PA5-4, PB3-1 to PB3-2, and PB4-1 to PB4-4 other than the variation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2. , PB5-1 to PA5-4, active display change effect patterns BP2 to BP4, which are successful effects of the first system change effect, active display change effect patterns CP2 to CP3, which are successful effects of the second system change effect, The ratio determined for the active display change rendering patterns AP2 to AP12, which are the successful rendering of the first system change rendering and the second system change rendering, is higher than the ratio determined for the other active display change rendering patterns. , The degree of success expectation at which a successful effect can be executed is higher than the variation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2. That is, the fluctuation pattern as shown in FIG. 27 increases the degree of expectation that a successful effect can be executed.

In the illustrated example, the variation pattern (variable display pattern) of the variation (variable display) specified by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern PA3-1, PA4-1, PA4-2, PA5 that is not a pseudo continuous variation. -1, PA5-2, PB3-1, PB4-1, PB4-2, PB5-1, and PB5-2 indicate that the first system change effect is not executed at timing 2.
According to FIG. 28, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the determination ratio determined at an earlier timing (for example, timing 1) is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach). ing. Further, when the variation pattern is a “big hit”, the determination ratio determined at a later timing (for example, timing 4) of the first system change effect is higher than the variation pattern that is a “losing”. . After the reach is established (for example, timing 3 and timing 4), the degree of expectation of a successful effect is higher than before the reach is established (for example, timing 1 and timing 2). In addition, after the temporary stop of the variable display in the pseudo continuous fluctuation (for example, timing 3 and timing 4), the degree of expectation of the successful effect becomes higher than before the temporary stop of the variable display in the pseudo continuous fluctuation (for example, timing 1). I have.

  That is, in the effect execution setting process (step S532), the effect control CPU 120 changes the random number MR9 for determining the item timing of the active display change effect and the change of the change (the variable display) specified by the change pattern specifying command. The execution timing of the active display change effect when the active display change effect is executed is determined based on the pattern (variable display pattern).

  In addition, at the timing 2, according to the number of temporary stoppages of the variable display in the pseudo continuous variation, for example, immediately after the start of the variable display, such as at the start of the first variable display or the start of the second variable display. May be determined as the execution timing of the first system change effect, or the execution timing of the first system change effect may be determined at a plurality of execution timings in a plurality of pseudo consecutive fluctuations. Further, the timing 2 at the time of the pseudo-run fluctuation may be after the reach is established. For example, the execution timing is set so that the timing 2 at the time of the pseudo-run fluctuation is set after the timing 3 at the time of the reach establishment in FIG. Alternatively, a plurality of timings including four timings may be set as the execution timing of the first system change effect.

In addition, a setting example of the determination ratio of the effect mode of the first system change effect when the first system change effect is executed as the active display change effect illustrated in FIG. 27, and the execution timing of the first system change effect illustrated in FIG. May be stored in the ROM 121 as one table.
The same applies to the execution timing of the second system change effect and the execution timing of executing both the first system change effect and the second system change effect.

  The setting example (not shown) of the determination ratio by the execution timing determination table of the second system change effect is the setting example of the determination ratio by the effect execution timing determination table at the time of the execution of the first system change effect as shown in FIG. It may be the same, or may be a setting example of the determination ratio by the execution timing determination table of the second system change effect different from the setting example of the determination ratio by the effect execution timing determination table at the time of the execution of the first system change effect. Good.

  If it is determined in FIG. 26 that the “first system change effect and the second system change effect” are to be executed, the execution timing of the first system change effect and the second system change effect is set as an effect as shown in FIG. Using the setting example of the determination ratio by the execution timing determination table, the first system change effect and the second system change effect may be collectively determined to be executed at the same timing, or the first system change effect and the first system change effect may be determined at the same time. The execution timings for the two-system change effect may be determined collectively so that the execution timings may be different. When it is determined in FIG. 26 that the “first system change effect and the second system change effect” are to be executed, the execution timings of the first system change effect and the second system change effect are as shown in FIG. The execution timing of each of the first system change effect and the second system change effect may be separately determined using the setting example of the determination ratio in the effect execution timing determination table.

  Next, a process of setting (or resetting) the effect control pattern based on the selection result of the active display change effect will be described.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the active display change effect determined based on the change pattern designated by the change pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11. The effect pattern of the effect and the execution timing of the active display change effect are set as the effect control pattern. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command as the effect control pattern, and also sets the effect corresponding to the effect mode of the selected active display change effect. Set the pattern as a production control pattern. When a plurality of effect control patterns corresponding to the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command are prepared, one of them is selected and set as the effect control pattern. Then, the effect execution setting process (step S532) ends.

  Next, a specific example of control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

  On the main board 11 side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the first starting condition is satisfied, the CPU 103 updates the first reserved storage number, and when the second starting condition is satisfied, the CPU 103 updates the second reserved storage number. Is updated (step S215). The CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category (step S217). The CPU 103 determines the special figure display result using the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the like (steps S403 and S404). The CPU 103 determines the fluctuation category based on the special figure display result that is the determination result, the suspended storage number updated in step S215, and the random number value MR3 for fluctuation category extraction extracted in step S217 (step S412). . The CPU 103 that has determined the fluctuation category sets transmission of a fluctuation category command that specifies the fluctuation category as a result of the determination (step S413), and executes a command control process (step S17). As a result, a fluctuation category command specifying the fluctuation category determined in step S412 is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  On the main board 11 side, when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the CPU 103 first performs the change category determination process extracted in step S217 in the change pattern setting process (step S111). Without using the random number value MR3, the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation category is extracted again, and numerical data indicating the random number value MR5 for determining the fluctuation pattern is extracted again. Subsequently, the CPU 103 determines the fluctuation pattern based on the numerical data indicating the newly extracted random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation category or the numerical data indicating the random number value MR5 for determining the fluctuation pattern. The CPU 103 that has determined the variation pattern sets transmission of a variation pattern designation command that designates the variation pattern as the determination result, and executes a command control process (step S17). As a result, a variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern determined in step S111 is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  On the side of the effect control board 12 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the first start condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 executes the first start winning storage display area 5HL or the second start in the hold effect determination process (step S160). The display mode (display mode at the time of addition) of the hold display when the additional display is performed in the winning storage display area 5HR is determined. Further, the effect control CPU 120 stores the determination contents (for example, the display mode at the time of addition) of the reserved effect determination process in the first prefetch notice buffer 194C or the second prefetch notice buffer based on the decision result of the reserved effect decision process. At the same time, it is stored (step S161), and a hold display is added to the first start winning storage display area 5HL or the second start winning storage display area 5HR based on the stored contents (display mode at the time of addition) (step S162).

  On the side of the effect control board 12, when the first start condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the first look-ahead notice buffer 194C or the second look-ahead notice buffer 194D, and in the variable display, An effect control pattern is set based on the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command transmitted from the board 11.

  FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the image display device 5. More specifically, (a) to (d) of FIG. 29A (A) and (e) of FIG. 29B (A) show the scenes in the image display device 5 arranged in chronological order. The same applies to (a) to (d) of FIG. 29 (B) and (e) of FIG. 29B (B). 29A and 29B, the arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing. FIGS. 29A (A) and 29B (A) show a successful effect of the second system change effect, and show the active display change effect pattern CP3 shown in FIG. 27 (B) as the effect of the active display change effect. (Changed (thickness "extremely thick")) is assumed to be set. FIGS. 29A (B) and 29B (B) show a failure effect of the second system change effect, and show the active display change effect pattern CP1 shown in FIG. 27 (B) as the effect of the active display change effect. (No change (thickness "normal")) is assumed to be set.

(A) of FIG. 29A (A) shows an active display AH in an active display area AHA (an active display in which a hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to a predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started; Alternatively, a special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. It is a scene.
Here, the active display area AHA is provided, for example, at the lower center of the image display device 5. The active display area AHA displays at least the active display AH, and includes, in addition to the active display AH, an active display frame AHW surrounding the active display AH and a predetermined range including the active display frame AHW. Characters and images can be displayed in the active display area AHA such as the active display area AH itself or the inside or outside of the active display frame AHW.

  Immediately before the active display AH is displayed in the active display area AHA as shown in (a) of FIG. 29A (A), a hold display (active display AH) is stored in the buffer number “1” of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C. The display mode (display mode at the time of addition “white”) of the hold display (active display AH) determined at the time of starting winning of the hold display (active display AH) is stored as the effect content corresponding to the first look ahead notice. In the buffer number “2” of the buffer 194C, the display mode of the hold display H1 (display mode at the time of addition “white”) determined at the time of starting winning of the hold display H1 is stored as the effect content corresponding to the hold display H1, The buffer number “3” of the first look-ahead notice buffer 194C was determined as the effect content corresponding to the reserved display H2 when the reserved display H2 was started and awarded. The display mode of the hold display H2 (display mode at the time of addition “white”) is stored, and the buffer number “4” of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C starts the hold display H3 as an effect corresponding to the hold display H3. It is assumed that the display mode of the hold display H3 determined at the time of winning (the white display mode at the time of addition) is stored.

The scene (a) of FIG. 29A (A) starts variable display of active information of the active display AH (information corresponding to the pending information immediately before the active display AH is displayed as the active display AH in the active display area AHA). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 starts the fluctuation of the decorative design based on the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1 (non-reach (losing))” specified by the fluctuation pattern specifying command transmitted from the main board 11. After that, the fixed decoration symbols ("3", "9", "4") are in a state of being stopped and displayed.
From the scene (a) of FIG. 29A (A), when one game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, the CPU 103 sets the first reserved storage number to “4”. "(Step S215). The CPU 103 extracts the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category (step S217). The special figure display result is determined using the random number value MR1 or the random number value MR2 for determining the type of the big hit (step S403, step S404).

  For example, it is assumed that “losing” has been determined as a special map display result. The CPU 103 selects the fluctuation category determination table “C-TBL3” from the plurality of fluctuation category determination tables (FIG. 17) based on the special figure display result “losing” and the number of retained storages “4” (FIG. 16). ), The change category is determined based on the change category determination table “C-TBL3” and the random value MR3 for determining the change category (step S412). For example, it is assumed that the fluctuation category “PB5 (super reach β (big hit))” has been determined. The CPU 103 sets the transmission of the fluctuation category command specifying the fluctuation category “PB5” (step S413), and executes the command control processing (step S17) to mainly execute the fluctuation category command specifying the fluctuation category “PB5”. It is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12.

The effect control CPU 120 that has received the fluctuation category command for designating the fluctuation category from the main board 11 uses the suspension display mode to be used from among the plurality of suspension display mode determination tables as shown in FIG. 24 based on the fluctuation category. A determination table is selected, and a display form of a hold display (additional display) to be additionally displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL based on the selected hold display form determination table and the random number value MR6 for determining the display form of the hold display. Display mode) is determined.
The effect control CPU 120 determines these pending effect determination processes in association with the buffer number of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number of the first start winning in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A. The contents (display mode at the time of addition) are stored.

In the scene (b) of FIG. 29A (A), the effect control CPU 120 displays the active display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 displayed in the first start winning storage display area in the active display area AHA, and displays the hold. This is an example when the variable display of the active display AH corresponding to H1 is started. For example, in the scene (b) of FIG. 29A (A), it is assumed that the active display AH is a fluctuation for executing the second system change effect. (C) of FIG. 29A (A) shows a case where the second system change effect is executed immediately after the variable display is started in the scene of (b) of FIG. 29A (A) (for example, at timing 1 in FIG. 28). This is an example. In (c) of FIG. 29A (A), an arrow Y2 in which the character of "hot heat" is drawn is displayed on the upper left of the image display device 5 as a second system change effect. 29A (B) to (C) of FIG. 29A (B) are the same as (a) of FIG. 29A (A) to (c) of FIG. 29A (A).
That is, the second system change is shown from (b) of FIG. 29A (A) to (c) of FIG. 29A (A) and from (b) of FIG. 29A (B) to (c) of FIG. 29A (B). This is a common production performed in common for a successful production and a failed production in the production.

In the scene (d) of FIG. 29A (A), the arrow Y2 as the second system change effect displayed in the scene (c) of FIG. 29A (A) moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. Then, it is a scene in which it collides with the active display frame AHW.
In the scene (e) of FIG. 29B (A), after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW in the scene (d) of FIG. 29A (A), the thickness of the line of the active display frame AHW is “extremely thick”. Has been changed as the display mode.
Then, in the scene (e) of FIG. 29B (A), the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5L and the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5R are in the reach mode.

On the other hand, in the scene (d) of FIG. 29A (B), the arrow Y2 which is the second system change effect displayed in the scene (c) of FIG. 29A (B) moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. Then, the scene is moving to the lower part of the image display device 5 without colliding with the active display frame AHW.
In the scene (e) of FIG. 29B (B), since the arrow Y2 has disappeared without colliding with the active display frame AHW in the scene (d) of FIG. 29A (B), the line thickness of the active display frame AHW is reduced. The display state of “normal” remains unchanged.
Then, in the scene (e) of FIG. 29B (B), the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5L and the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5R are in the reach mode.

  FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the image display device 5. More specifically, (a) to (d) of FIG. 30A (A) and (e) to (f) of FIG. 30B (A) show the scenes on the image display device 5 arranged in chronological order. . The same applies to (a) to (d) of FIG. 30 (B) and (e) to (f) of FIG. 30B (B). 30A and 30B, the arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing. FIGS. 30A (A) and 30B (A) show a successful effect of the first system change effect, and show the active display change effect pattern BP4 shown in FIG. 27 (A) as the effect of the active display change effect. (Changed (shape “star”)) is assumed to be set. FIGS. 30A (B) and 30B (B) show a failure effect of the first system change effect, and show the active display change effect pattern BP1 (change) shown in FIG. It is assumed that nothing (shape “sphere”) is set.

  (A) of FIG. 30A (A) shows an active display AH in an active display area AHA (an active display in which a hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to a predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started; Alternatively, a special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. It is a scene.

  The scene (a) of FIG. 30A (A) starts variable display of active information of the active display AH (information corresponding to the pending information immediately before the active display AH is displayed as the active display AH in the active display area AHA). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 starts changing the decorative design based on the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1 (non-reach (losing))” specified by the fluctuation pattern specifying command transmitted from the main board 11. After that, the determined decorative symbols ("3", "9", "4") are in a state of being stopped and displayed.

  In the scene (b) of FIG. 30A (A), the effect control CPU 120 displays the active display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 displayed in the first start winning storage display area in the active display area AHA, and displays the hold display. This is an example when the variable display of the active display AH corresponding to H1 is started. For example, in the scene (b) of FIG. 30A (A), it is assumed that the active display AH is a fluctuation for executing the first system change effect. The scene (b) of FIG. 30A (A) is an example when the first system change effect is executed immediately after the variable display is started (for example, at timing 1 in FIG. 28). In (b) of FIG. 30A (A), three figures (star Z1, triangle Z2, and pentagon Z3) are displayed as a figure group Y1 in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 as a first system change effect.

In the scene (c) of FIG. 30A (A), the figure group Y1 as the first system change effect displayed in the scene (b) of FIG. 30A (A) is directed toward the lower part of the image display device 5. In this scene, the triangle Z2 disappears while moving, and the star Z1 and the pentagon Z3 continue to move.
In the scene (d) of FIG. 30A (A), the graphic group Y1 as the first system change effect further moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5 from the scene (c) of FIG. Of the star Z1 and the pentagon Z3 forming the group Y1, the pentagon Z3 has disappeared, and only the star Z1 continues to move. 30A (B) to (D) of FIG. 30A (B) are similar to (a) of FIG. 30A (A) to (d) of FIG. 30A (A).
That is, the first system change occurs from (b) of FIG. 30A (A) to (d) of FIG. 30A (A) and from (b) of FIG. 30A (B) to (d) of FIG. 30A (B). This is a common production performed in common for a successful production and a failed production in the production.

Then, in the scene (e) of FIG. 30B (A), the star Z1 remaining without disappearing in the graphic group Y1 as the first system change effect displayed in the scene (d) of FIG. 30A (A). This is a scene further moving toward the lower part of the image display device 5 and colliding with the active display AH.
In the scene (f) of FIG. 30B (A), after the star Z1 remaining without disappearing in the graphic group Y1 collides with the active display AH in the scene (e) of FIG. It is displayed in a display mode in which the display shape has changed to “star”.
Then, in the scene (f) of FIG. 30B (A), the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5L and the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5R are in the reach mode.

On the other hand, in the scene (e) of FIG. 30B (B), the star Z1 remaining without disappearing in the graphic group Y1 as the first system change effect displayed in the scene (d) of FIG. This is a scene that further moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5, but disappears before colliding with the active display AH.
In the scene (f) of FIG. 30B (B), the star Z1 remaining without disappearing in the graphic group Y1 on the active display AH in the scene (e) of FIG. The display shape of the display AH is displayed in a display mode in which the display shape is “sphere”.
Then, in the scene (f) of FIG. 30B (B), the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5L and the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5R are in the reach mode.

  FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (d) of FIG. 31A (A) and (e) to (g) of FIG. 31B (A) show the scenes in the image display device 5 arranged in chronological order. . The same applies to (a) to (d) of FIG. 31 (B) and (e) to (g) of FIG. 31B (B). 31A and 31B, the arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing. Also, FIGS. 31A (A) and 31B (A) show successful effects of the first system change effect and the second system change effect, and are shown in FIG. 27 (C) as the effect of the active display change effect. It is assumed that the active display change effect pattern AP12 (changed (thickness “extreme”), changed (shape “star”)) is set. FIGS. 31A (B) and 31B (B) show failure effects of the first system change effect and the second system change effect, and show the active display shown in FIG. 27 (C) as the effect of the active display change effect. It is assumed that a change effect pattern AP1 (no change (shape “sphere”), no change (thickness “normal”)) is set.

  (A) of FIG. 31A (A) shows an active display AH in the active display area AHA (an active display in which a hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to a predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started; Alternatively, a special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. It is a scene.

  In the scene (a) of FIG. 31A (A), the variable display of the active information of the active display AH (information corresponding to the pending information immediately before the active display AH is displayed as the active display AH in the active display area AHA) is started. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 starts changing the decorative design based on the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1 (non-reach (losing))” specified by the fluctuation pattern specifying command transmitted from the main board 11. After that, the determined decorative symbols ("3", "9", "4") are stopped and displayed.

  In the scene (b) of FIG. 31A (A), the effect control CPU 120 displays the active display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 displayed in the first start winning storage display area in the active display area AHA, and displays the hold display. This is an example when the variable display of the active display AH corresponding to H1 is started.

In the scene (b) of FIG. 31A (A), the effect control CPU 120 displays the active display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 displayed in the first start winning storage storage display area in the active display area AHA, and displays the hold display. This is an example when the variable display of the active display AH corresponding to H1 is started. For example, in the scene (b) of FIG. 31A (A), it is assumed that the active display AH is a fluctuation for executing the second system change effect. (C) of FIG. 31A (A) shows the first system change effect and the second system change effect immediately after starting the variable display in the scene of (b) of FIG. 31A (A) (for example, at timing 1 in FIG. 28). This is an example of when is executed. In (c) of FIG. 31A (A), three figures (star Z1, triangle Z2, and pentagon Z3) are displayed as a figure group Y1 in the upper right part of the image display device 5 as a first system change effect. As an effect, an arrow Y <b> 2 on which the character “heat” is drawn is displayed at the upper left of the image display device 5.
31A (B) to FIG. 31A (B) (c) are the same as FIG. 31A (A) (a) to FIG. 31A (A) (c).
That is, the first system change occurs from (b) in FIG. 31A (A) to (c) in FIG. 31A (A) and from (b) in FIG. 31A (B) to (c) in FIG. 31A (B). This is a common effect that is performed in common for the successful effect and the failed effect in the effect and the second system change effect.

In the scene (d) of FIG. 31A (A), the figure group Y1 as the first system change effect displayed in the scene (c) of FIG. 30A (A) is directed toward the lower part of the image display device 5. The triangle Z2 disappears while moving, and the star Z1 and the pentagon Z3 continue to move. Also, a scene in which the arrow Y2 as the second system change effect displayed in the scene (c) of FIG. 31A (A) moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5 and collides with the active display frame AHW. It is.
Then, in the scene (e) of FIG. 31B (A), after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW in the scene (d) of FIG. 31A (A), the line thickness of the active display frame AHW is changed to “ It is changing as the display mode of “extremely thick”. In the scene (e) of FIG. 31A (A), the graphic group Y1 as the first system change effect further moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5 from the scene (d) of FIG. 31A (A). The pentagon Z3 of the star Z1 and the pentagon Z3 forming the graphic group Y1 disappears, and only the star Z1 continues to move.

In the scene (f) of FIG. 31B (A), the star Z1 remaining without disappearing in the graphic group Y1 as the first system change effect displayed in the scene (e) of FIG. 30A (A). This is a scene further moving toward the lower part of the image display device 5 and colliding with the active display AH.
In the scene (g) of FIG. 31B (A), after the star Z1 remaining without disappearing in the graphic group Y1 collides with the active display AH in the scene (f) of FIG. It is displayed in a display mode in which the display shape has changed to “star”.
Then, in the scene (g) of FIG. 30B (A), the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5L and the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5R are in the reach mode.

On the other hand, in the scene (d) of FIG. 31A (B), the arrow Y2 which is the second system change effect displayed in the scene (c) of FIG. 31A (B) moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. Then, the scene is moving to the lower part of the image display device 5 without colliding with the active display frame AHW. In the scene (e) of FIG. 31A (B), the figure group Y1 as the first system change effect further moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5 from the scene (d) of FIG. 31A (B). The pentagon Z3 of the star Z1 and the pentagon Z3 forming the graphic group Y1 disappears, and only the star Z1 continues to move.
Then, in the scene (f) of FIG. 31B (B), the star Z1 remaining without disappearing in the graphic group Y1 as the first system change effect displayed in the scene (e) of FIG. 31A (B). This is a scene that further moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5, but disappears before colliding with the active display AH.
In the scene (g) of FIG. 31B (B), the star Z1 remaining without disappearing in the graphic group Y1 on the active display AH in the scene (f) of FIG. The display shape of the display AH is displayed in a display mode in which the display shape is “sphere”. Also, in the scene (g) of FIG. 31B (B), the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5L and the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5R are in the reach mode.

  FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the image display device 5. More specifically, (a) to (d) of FIG. 32A (A) and (e) to (f) of FIG. 32B (A) show the respective scenes in the image display device 5 arranged in chronological order. . The same applies to (a) to (d) of FIG. 32 (B) and (e) to (f) of FIG. 32B (B). 32A and 32B, the arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing. Further, FIGS. 32A (A) and 32B (A) show a successful effect of the second system change effect, and show the active display change effect pattern CP3 shown in FIG. 27 (B) as the effect of the active display change effect. (Changed (thickness "extremely thick")) is assumed to be set. FIGS. 32A (B) and 32B (B) show a failure effect of the second system change effect, and show the active display change effect pattern CP1 shown in FIG. 27 (B) as the effect of the active display change effect. (No change (thickness "normal")) is assumed to be set.

  (A) of FIG. 32A (A) shows an active display AH in an active display area AHA (an active display in which a hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to a predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started; Alternatively, a special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. It is a scene.

  Immediately before the active display AH is displayed in the active display area AHA as shown in (a) of FIG. 32A, the display is suspended (active display AH) in the buffer number “1” of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C. The display mode (display mode at the time of addition “white”) of the hold display (active display AH) determined at the time of starting winning of the hold display (active display AH) is stored as the effect content corresponding to the first look ahead notice. In the buffer number “2” of the buffer 194C, the display mode of the hold display H1 (display mode at the time of addition “white”) determined at the time of starting winning of the hold display H1 is stored as the effect content corresponding to the hold display H1, The buffer number “3” of the first look-ahead notice buffer 194 </ b> C was determined as the effect content corresponding to the hold display H <b> 2 at the time of the start winning of the hold display H <b> 2. The display mode of the hold display H2 (display mode at the time of addition “white”) is stored, and the buffer number “4” of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C starts the hold display H3 as an effect corresponding to the hold display H3. It is assumed that the display mode of the hold display H3 determined at the time of winning (the white display mode at the time of addition) is stored.

In the scene (a) of FIG. 32A (A), variable display of active information of the active display AH (information corresponding to the pending information immediately before the active display AH is displayed as the active display AH in the active display area AHA) is started. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 starts the fluctuation of the decorative design based on the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1 (non-reach (losing))” specified by the fluctuation pattern specifying command transmitted from the main board 11. After that, the fixed decoration symbols ("3", "9", "4") are in a state of being stopped and displayed.
From the scene (a) of FIG. 32A (A), when one game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, the CPU 103 sets the first reserved storage number to “4”. "(Step S215). The CPU 103 extracts the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category (step S217). The special figure display result is determined using the random number value MR1 or the random number value MR2 for determining the type of the big hit (step S403, step S404).

  For example, it is assumed that “losing” has been determined as a special map display result. The CPU 103 selects the fluctuation category determination table “C-TBL3” from the plurality of fluctuation category determination tables (FIG. 17) based on the special figure display result “losing” and the number of retained storages “4” (FIG. 16). ), The change category is determined based on the change category determination table “C-TBL3” and the random value MR3 for determining the change category (step S412). For example, it is assumed that the fluctuation category “PB5 (super reach β (big hit))” has been determined. The CPU 103 sets the transmission of the fluctuation category command specifying the fluctuation category “PB5” (step S413), and executes the command control processing (step S17) to mainly execute the fluctuation category command specifying the fluctuation category “PB5”. It is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12.

The effect control CPU 120 that has received the fluctuation category command for designating the fluctuation category from the main board 11 uses the suspension display mode to be used from among the plurality of suspension display mode determination tables as shown in FIG. 24 based on the fluctuation category. A determination table is selected, and a display form of a hold display (additional display) to be additionally displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL based on the selected hold display form determination table and the random number value MR6 for determining the display form of the hold display. Display mode) is determined.
The effect control CPU 120 determines these pending effect determination processes in association with the buffer number of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number of the first start winning in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A. The contents (display mode at the time of addition) are stored.

In the scene (b) of FIG. 32A (A), the effect control CPU 120 displays the active display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 displayed in the first start winning storage display area in the active display area AHA, and displays the hold display. This is an example when the variable display of the active display AH corresponding to H1 is started. For example, in the scene (b) of FIG. 32A (A), it is assumed that the active display AH is a fluctuation for executing the second system change effect. In (c) of FIG. 32A (A), the reach is established after the variable display is started in the scene of (b) of FIG. 32A (A), and the decorative design of the decorative design display area 5L and the decorative design display area 5R are displayed. This is a scene in which the decorative pattern is in the reach mode.
The scene (d) of FIG. 32A (A) is an example when the second system change effect is executed after the reach is established (for example, at timing 3 in FIG. 28). In (d) of FIG. 32A (A), an arrow Y2 in which the character of "hot heat" is drawn is displayed on the upper left of the image display device 5 as a second system change effect.
32A (B) to (D) of FIG. 32A (B) are the same as (a) of FIG. 32A (A) to (d) of FIG. 32A (A).
That is, the second system change occurs from (b) of FIG. 32A (A) to (d) of FIG. 32A (A) and from (b) of FIG. 32A (B) to (d) of FIG. 32A (B). This is a common production performed in common for a successful production and a failed production in the production.

In the scene (e) of FIG. 32A (A), the arrow Y2, which is the second system change effect displayed in the scene (d) of FIG. 32A (A), moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. Then, it is a scene in which it collides with the active display frame AHW.
In the scene (f) of FIG. 32B (A), after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW in the scene (e) of FIG. 32A (A), the line thickness of the active display frame AHW is “extremely thick”. Has been changed as the display mode.

On the other hand, in the scene (e) of FIG. 32A (B), the arrow Y2 which is the second system change effect displayed in the scene (d) of FIG. 32A (B) moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. Then, the scene is moving to the lower part of the image display device 5 without colliding with the active display frame AHW.
In the scene (f) of FIG. 32B (B), since the arrow Y2 has disappeared without colliding with the active display frame AHW in the scene (e) of FIG. 32A (B), the line thickness of the active display frame AHW is reduced. The display state of “normal” remains unchanged.
Note that, similarly, for the second system change effect, the active display change effect may be executed after the reach is established. Similarly, the first system change effect and the second system change effect may also be executed after the reach is established.

  FIG. 33 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (f) of FIG. 33A and (g) to (h) of FIG. 33B show the scenes on the image display device 5 arranged in chronological order. In FIGS. 33A and 33B, the arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing. FIGS. 33A and 33B show a successful effect of the second system change effect, and show the active display change effect pattern CP3 (changed (thickness) shown in FIG. "Extremely thick")) is set. Here, the display operation examples shown in FIG. 33A and FIG. 33B are different from the display operation examples shown in FIG. 29A and FIG. The other parts are the same, and the different parts will be mainly described. The description of the failed effect is omitted.

  (A) of FIG. 33A shows an active display AH in the active display area AHA (an active display in which a hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to a predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started, or This is a scene in which a special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. .

In FIG. 33A (c), the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5L and the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5R after the variable display is started in the scene (b) in FIG. This is a scene stopped and displayed in a different display mode.
In the scene (d) of FIG. 33A, a chance symbol written as “Opportunity” appears on the image display device 5 by low-speed scrolling in the decorative symbol display area 5C, and in the scene (e) of FIG. 33A, the chance symbol is a decorative symbol. Temporarily stops at the display area 5C. Then, in the scene (f) of FIG. 33A, all the temporarily stopped decorative symbols are variably displayed (re-variable display).

In (g) of FIG. 33B, an arrow Y <b> 2 in which the character “super heat” is drawn is displayed at the upper left of the image display device 5 as a second system change effect.
33A to 33G are common effects that are commonly executed for a successful effect and a failed effect in the second system change effect.

Then, in the scene (h) of FIG. 33B, the arrow Y2, which is the second system change effect displayed in the scene of FIG. 33B (g), moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5, and the active display frame AHW It is a scene where it is colliding with.
In the scene (i) of FIG. 33B, after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW in the scene (h) of FIG. 33B, the thickness of the line of the active display frame AHW changes as a display mode of “extremely thick”. ing. Also, after the line thickness of the active display frame AHW has changed to the “extremely thick” display mode, the decorative pattern in the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5R have reached the reach mode.

  FIG. 34 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the image display device 5. More specifically, (a) to (f) of FIG. 34A and (g) to (j) of FIG. 34B are obtained by arranging the scenes on the image display device 5 in chronological order. In FIGS. 34A and 34B, the arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing. FIGS. 34A and 34B show a successful production of the second system change production, and show an active display change production pattern CP3 (changed (thickness) shown in FIG. "Extremely thick")) is set. Here, the display operation examples shown in FIGS. 34A and 34B are different from the display operation examples shown in FIGS. 29A and 29B in that they are pseudo continuous fluctuations. The other parts are the same, and the different parts will be mainly described. The description of the failed effect is omitted.

  34A shows an active display AH in the active display area AHA (an active display in which a hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to a predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started, or This is a scene in which a special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. .

In (c) of FIG. 34A, the reach is established after the variable display is started in the scene of (b) of FIG. 34A, and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5R are reach. This is a scene stopped and displayed in an aspect.
In the scene (d) of FIG. 34A, a chance symbol written as “Opportunity” appears on the image display device 5 by low-speed scrolling in the decorative symbol display area 5C, and in the scene (e) of FIG. Temporarily stops at the display area 5C. Then, in the scene (f) of FIG. 34A, all the temporarily stopped decorative symbols are variably displayed (re-variable display).

Further, in (f) of FIG. 34A, an arrow Y <b> 2 in which the character “super heat” is drawn is displayed on the upper left of the image display device 5 as the second system change effect.
Here, (a) of FIG. 34A to (f) of FIG. 34A are common effects that are commonly executed for a successful effect and a failed effect in the second system change effect.

In the scene (g) of FIG. 34B, the arrow Y2, which is the second system change effect displayed during the re-variable display in the scene of FIG. 34B (f), moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. , A scene colliding with the active display frame AHW.
In the scene (h) of FIG. 34B, after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW in the scene (g) of FIG. 34B, the thickness of the line of the active display frame AHW changes as a “thick” display mode. This is a scene in which the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5R are in the reach mode.
Then, in the scene (i) of FIG. 34B, after the thickness of the line of the active display frame AHW changes as the display mode of “extremely thick”, the decorative design of the decorative design display area 5L and the decorative design of the decorative design display area 5R. Is in the reach mode, a chance symbol is displayed on the image display device 5, and in the scene (j) of FIG. 34B, this chance symbol is not temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol display area 5C, and the decorative symbol is displayed. The decorative symbol in the area 5L and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5R are determined as the reach mode.

  FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the image display device 5. More specifically, (a) to (f) of FIG. 35A and (g) to (i) of FIG. 35B show respective scenes in the image display device 5 arranged in chronological order. In FIGS. 35A and 35B, an arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing. FIGS. 35A and 35B show a successful production of the second system change production, and show the active display change production pattern CP3 (changed (thickness) shown in FIG. "Extremely thick")) is set. Here, the timing of reach establishment differs between the display operation example shown in FIGS. 35A and 35B and the display operation example shown in FIGS. 34A and 34B. The other parts are the same, and the different parts will be mainly described. The description of the failed effect is omitted.

  (A) of FIG. 35A shows an active display AH in the active display area AHA (an active display in which a hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to a predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started, or This is a scene in which a special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. .

FIG. 35C shows an arrow Y2 in which the character “hot” is drawn on the upper left of the image display device 5 as a second system change effect after the variable display is started in the scene of FIG. 35B. Is displayed. Here, (a) of FIG. 35A to (c) of FIG. 35A are common effects that are commonly executed for the success effect and the failure effect in the second system change effect.
In the scene (d) of FIG. 35A, the arrow Y2 as the second system change effect displayed during the re-variable display in the scene of FIG. 35B (c) moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. , A scene colliding with the active display frame AHW.
Then, in the scene (e) of FIG. 35A, after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW, the line thickness of the active display frame AHW changes as the display mode of “extremely thick”, and the decorative symbol display area 5L is displayed. This is a scene in which the decorative symbol and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5R are stopped and displayed in a display mode different from the reach mode.

In the scene (f) of FIG. 35A, a chance symbol written as “Opportunity” appears on the image display device 5 by low-speed scrolling in the decorative symbol display area 5C, and in the scene (g) of FIG. 35B, the chance symbol is a decorative symbol. Temporarily stops at the display area 5C. Then, in the scene (h) of FIG. 35B, all the temporarily stopped decorative symbols are variably displayed (re-variable display).
Then, in the scene (i) of FIG. 35B, the pseudo-run variation is finished, and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5R are displayed in the reach mode.

  FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the image display device 5. More specifically, (a) to (f) of FIG. 36A and (g) to (i) of FIG. 36B show the scenes on the image display device 5 arranged in chronological order. In FIGS. 36A and 36B, the arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing. FIGS. 36A and 36B show a successful effect of the second system change effect, and show the active display change effect pattern CP3 (changed (thickness) shown in FIG. "Extremely thick")) is set. Here, the timing of reaching is different between the display operation example shown in FIGS. 35A and 35B and the display operation example shown in FIGS. 35A and 35B. The other parts are the same, and the different parts will be mainly described. The description of the failed effect is omitted.

  36A shows an active display AH in the active display area AHA (an active display in which a hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to a predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started, or This is a scene in which a special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. .

(C) of FIG. 36A shows an arrow Y2 in which the character “hot” is drawn on the upper left of the image display device 5 as a second system change effect after the variable display is started in the scene of (b) of FIG. 36A. Is displayed. Here, (a) of FIG. 35A to (c) of FIG. 35A are common effects that are commonly executed for the success effect and the failure effect in the second system change effect.
In the scene (d) of FIG. 36A, the arrow Y2, which is the second system change effect displayed during the revariable display in the scene of FIG. 35B (c), moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. , A scene colliding with the active display frame AHW.
Then, in the scene (e) of FIG. 36A, after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW, the line thickness of the active display frame AHW changes as the display mode of “extremely thick”, and the decorative symbol display area 5L is displayed. This is a scene in which the decorative symbol and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5R are stopped and displayed in the reach mode.

In the scene (f) of FIG. 36A, a chance symbol written as “Opportunity” appears on the image display device 5 by low-speed scrolling in the decorative symbol display area 5C, and in the scene (g) of FIG. 36B, the chance symbol is a decorative symbol. Temporarily stops at the display area 5C. Then, in the scene (h) of FIG. 36B, all the temporarily stopped decorative symbols are variably displayed (re-variable display).
Then, in the scene (i) of FIG. 36B, the pseudo-run variation is finished, and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5R are displayed in the reach mode.

  Here, in FIGS. 36A and 36B, examples of scenes in which the decorative design of the decorative design display area 5L and the decorative design of the decorative design display area 5R are displayed in the reach mode are shown in FIGS. 36A (e) and 36B (i). 36A and 36B, when the pseudo-run fluctuation occurs after the reach is established, “timing 3” in FIG. 28 is treated as the timing in FIG. 36B (i). In other words, the reach in FIGS. 36A and 36B means that the pseudo-run variation has been completed and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5R are displayed in the reach mode (see FIG. 36B). This is the scene i).

  Note that in FIGS. 29 to 36, a successful effect can be executed at a timing at which the active display change effect (the first system change effect, the second system change effect, the first system change effect, and the second system change effect) is executed. If the degree of expectation is different, for example, when there is an active display change effect performed at the first timing and an active display change effect performed at the second timing later than the first timing, the change is performed at the second timing. This indicates that there is a high degree of expectation that a successful effect in the active display change effect can be executed.

(Modification)
The display mode of the hold display may not be the display mode indicating the degree of expectation for the big hit as shown in FIG. 24, and is different from the normal mode which is a normal (default, initial color) display mode and the normal mode. It may include a special mode and a first special mode and a second special mode which are different modes from the normal mode and the special mode. This will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 37, 38, and 39.

For example, instead of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display illustrated in FIG. 24, another setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display illustrated in FIG. 37 may be used.
FIG. 37 is a diagram illustrating another setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display. Note that the ROM 121 may store seven types of hold display mode determination tables corresponding to the variation categories. FIG. 37 (A) shows a hold display mode selected when the change category is “PA1 (short / non-reach loss)” or the change category “PA2 (non-reach (loss)”) among the above seven types. It is a setting example (H-TBL1) of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the determination table. FIG. 37B shows a setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the change category is “PA3 (normal reach (losing))” among the above seven types ( H-TBL2). FIG. 37 (C) shows the setting of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PA4 (super reach α (loss))” among the above seven types. It is an example (H-TBL3).

  FIG. 37 (D) shows a setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the change category is “PA5 (super reach β (loss)”) among the above seven types. (E-TBL4) Fig. 37 (E) shows the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the change category is "PB3 (normal reach (big hit))" among the above seven types. 37 (F) is a setting example (H-TBL5) of the determination ratio of the mode, and FIG.37 (F) shows a hold selected when the change category is “PB4 (super reach α (big hit)”) among the above seven types. 37 is a setting example (H-TBL6) of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the display mode determination table. (G) of FIG. 13 is a setting example (H-TBL7) of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display according to the hold display mode determination table selected when “H (big hit)”.

  A comparison between FIG. 37 and FIG. 24 is that a part of the determination ratio for “white” in each hold display mode determination table in FIG. 24 is assigned to “gray” in FIG. Specifically, the determination ratio for “white” in each hold display mode determination table is 4: 1 between the determination ratio for “white” and the determination ratio for “gray” in each hold display mode determination table in FIG. It is a setting example in which the determination ratio is allocated as described above. In this setting example, “white” is a display mode (normal mode) of a normal hold display, and “gray” is a special mode different from the normal mode. The special mode is the same as the normal mode and the expectation for the jackpot, but when the “gray” pending display becomes the active display, the ratio of executing the active display change effect of changing the display mode of the active display is changed. This is a display mode indicating that the price is high.

  Also, in the setting example, unlike the normal mode and the special mode, the degree of expectation for the big hit is different (for example, the expectation for the big hit is higher than the normal mode and the special mode). Unlike the aspect and the special mode, the degree of expectation for the jackpot is different (for example, the expectation for the jackpot is higher than the first special mode). A third special mode, such as red, which has a different degree of expectation (eg, a higher degree of expectation for a big hit than the second special mode) may be included.

  For example, in the first suspension effect determination process (step S160), the effect control CPU 120 determines the plurality of suspension display modes shown in FIG. 37 based on the fluctuation category specified by the fluctuation category command transmitted from the main board 11. The hold display mode determination table to be used is selected from the determination table, and is added to the first start winning storage display area 5HL based on the selected hold display mode determination table and the random number value MR6 for determining the display mode of the hold display. The display mode of the hold display to be displayed (display mode at the time of addition) may be determined.

  Then, after executing the first reservation effect determination process (step S160), the production control CPU 120 stores the determination content of the first reservation effect determination process based on the determination result of the first reservation effect determination process (step S160). S161). Specifically, for example, the effect control CPU 120 sets the display mode of the hold display in the first hold effect determination process to the first start winning reception command buffer 194A corresponding to the first start winning buffer number corresponding to the first start winning buffer number. The determination content (display mode at the time of addition) of the first reservation effect determination process is stored in association with the buffer number of the prefetch notice buffer 194C.

  Then, after executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 determines the display mode of the hold display determined in the first hold effect determination process (step S160) (the first display in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A). A new hold display is added to the first start-up prize storage display area 5HL based on the additional display mode stored in association with the buffer number of the first look-ahead notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number of the start-up prize. A first hold addition process is executed (step S162). More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first startup winning storage display area 5HL to display a hold display in the additional display mode stored in association with the buffer number of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C described above. By setting the control pattern as a use pattern and transmitting a display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, the first suspension effect The hold display in the additional display mode determined in the determination process is added to the first start winning storage display area 5HL.

  Then, in the process of step S532 in the effect execution setting process of FIG. 25, a process of determining whether to execute an active display change effect for an active display corresponding to the change, The process of determining whether or not to execute the active display change effect. In the case of the active display (fluctuation) for executing the active display change effect, the process of determining the effect mode of the active display change effect to be executed. A process for determining the timing for executing the active display change effect, a process for setting (or resetting) the effect control pattern based on the selection result of the active display change effect, and the like are executed.

  Here, the effect execution setting process (step S532) will be described in detail. First, a process for determining whether or not to execute an active display change effect for an active display corresponding to the change, and a process for determining which active display change effect to execute when performing an active display change effect will be described. I do. When using the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display shown in FIG. 37, the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table shown in FIG. 38 may be used instead of the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table shown in FIG. . Here, the setting example of the determination ratio by the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table shown in FIG. 26 and the setting example of the determination ratio by the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table shown in FIG. The point of referring to the setting example of the determination ratio by another active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table differs depending on whether the display mode of the display is the special mode or not.

FIG. 38 is a diagram showing another example of setting the determination ratio by the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table. Specifically, FIG. 38A is a setting example of the determination ratio by the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table which is referred to when the display mode of the active display corresponding to the change is not the special mode (gray). FIG. 38 (B) is a setting example of the determination ratio by the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table which is referred to when the display mode of the active display corresponding to the change is the special mode (gray).
Each of the setting examples shown in FIGS. 38 (A) and 38 (B) is similar to the setting example shown in FIG. 26 as to whether or not to execute the active display change effect, and to determine whether to execute the active display change effect. It is a setting example of the determination ratio of the production mode of the active display change production.
Each of the setting examples shown in FIGS. 38A and 38B is compared with a random number value MR7 (not shown) for determining whether or not to execute the active display change effect in the active display change effect execution determination table. Numerical values (determined values) are assigned to “executed” and “unexecuted” at the determined ratios as shown in FIG. 38 (A) and FIG. 38 (B). Further, in the “executed” of the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR7 (not shown) for determining the active display change effect execution presence / absence is set in the “first system”. 38A and FIG. 38B for each of the "change effect", the "second system change effect", and the "first system change effect and the second system change effect". Assigned by percentage.

  Note that “executed” and “first system change effect” indicate that the first system change effect is performed as an active display change effect, and “executed” and “second system change effect” indicate that the second system change effect is performed. The “active” and “first system change effect and second system change effect” indicate that the effect is performed as an active display change effect, and “active display change effect” indicates both the first system change effect and the second system change effect. Indicates that it will be performed as an effect. "No execution" indicates that the active display change effect is not performed. Further, the variation pattern 1-X represents the variation pattern PA1-1 shown in FIG. 5, and the variation pattern PA2-X represents one of the variation patterns PA2-1, PA2-2, and PA2-3 shown in FIG. , The variation pattern PA3-X represents one of the variation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 shown in FIG. 5, and the variation pattern PA4 is the variation pattern PA4-1, PA4-2, PA4-3, Represents any of PA4-4. The same applies to the variation patterns PA5-X, PB4-X, and PB5-X.

  According to FIG. 38, when the variation pattern (variable display pattern) of the variation (variable display) designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation patterns PA1-X and PA2-X, “No execution” is set to 100. %, Indicating that none of the first system change effect, the second system change effect, the first system change effect, and the second system change effect are executed. Also, when the active display change effect is executed (in the case of “executed” in FIGS. 38 (A) and 38 (B)), when a reach is hot (for example, super reach), a reach that is not hot (for example, normal reach) ), The rate of execution of the first system change effect is higher than that of the second system change effect. In addition, when the variation pattern is “big hit”, the rate at which the first system change effect is executed is higher than when the change pattern is “losing” than when the second system change effect is performed. In addition, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the ratio at which both the first system change effect and the second system change effect are executed is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach). ing. Further, when the variation pattern is “big hit”, the ratio of executing both the first system change effect and the second system change effect is higher than when the change pattern is “losing”.

Also, depending on whether or not the active display corresponding to the change is a special mode, the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the active display change effect is different. If the active display corresponding to the change is the special mode, Is higher than the case where the active display corresponding to is not a special mode.
Also, the case where the special mode as shown in FIG. 26 is not considered, the case where the special mode as shown in FIG. 38A is considered and the active display corresponding to the change is not the special mode, and the case where FIG. In consideration of the special mode as shown in FIG. 38, the case where the active display corresponding to the change is the special mode is compared with the case where the active display is the special mode. The determination ratio according to the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table shown in FIG. 26 and the determination ratio according to the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table shown in FIG. ing.

  That is, in the effect execution setting process (step S532), the effect control CPU 120 is designated by the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table, the random number value MR7 for determining whether to execute the active display change effect, and the fluctuation pattern designation command. Whether or not to execute the active display change effect is determined by the change pattern (variable display pattern) of the change (the variable display). When the active display change effect is executed, a plurality of active display change effects are produced. Which active display change effect is to be executed is determined.

  The effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the active display change effect is to be executed, and when it is determined to be “executed”, the “first system change effect”, the “second system change effect”, or the “first system change effect”. And second system change effect "may be determined.

  The figure group Y1 displayed as the first system change effect may be determined so that the degree of expectation for a big hit changes depending on a combination of figures constituting the figure group Y1. This will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of the determination ratio by the first system detailed pattern determination table when the first system change effect is executed.
In each setting example shown in FIG. 39, for example, ten types of first system detailed patterns SHP1 corresponding to combinations of three figures of a triangle, a pentagon, and a star are stored in the first system detailed pattern determination table of the first system change effect. To SHP10. The first system detailed pattern includes a case where only the first system change effect is executed (when it is determined to be one of the active display change effect patterns BP1 to BP4 in FIG. 27A), and a case where the first system change effect is performed. This is referred to when both the second system change effect is executed (when any of the active display change effect patterns AP1 to AP12 in FIG. 27C is determined).

  In the first system detailed pattern, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number value MR8 (not shown) for determining the first system detailed pattern is determined by the active display change effect pattern at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. Have been assigned.

  It is assumed that the ROM 121 stores first detailed system patterns as ten different types of first system change effects according to the sixteen active display change effect patterns shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 39, the first system detailed pattern “SHP1” is an effect pattern when all three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are configured by triangles. According to the illustrated example, AP1 to AP3 and BP1 have a high determination ratio determined when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach) in FIG. 27, and when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach), The determination ratio determined by the first system detailed pattern SHP1 is higher than when hot reach (for example, super reach) is performed. Further, the display mode of the active display corresponding to the change is determined by the active display change effect pattern determined in FIG. 27, and the first system details that can be the display mode of the active display corresponding to the determined change The pattern is determined.

Similarly, the first system detailed pattern “SHP2” is an effect pattern when three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are formed of a pentagon, a triangle, and a triangle, and the first system detailed pattern “SHP3” is a figure. This is an effect pattern when the three figures constituting the group Y1 are pentagons, pentagons, and triangles. The first system detailed pattern "SHP4" has three figures constituting the figure group Y1 as pentagons, pentagons, and pentagons. The first system detailed pattern “SHP5” is an effect pattern when three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are configured by a star, a triangle, and a triangle. The detailed pattern “SHP6” is an effect pattern when the three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are composed of a star, a pentagon, and a triangle, and the first system detailed pattern “SHP6”. 7 ”is an effect pattern when the three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are constituted by a star, a pentagon, and a pentagon, and the first system detailed pattern“ SHP8 ”is a figure representing three figures constituting the figure group Y1. The first system detailed pattern "SHP9" is an effect pattern when the three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are composed of a star, a star, and a pentagon. The first system detailed pattern “SHP10” is an effect pattern when all three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are constituted by stars.
According to the illustrated example, the degree of expectation that a successful effect can be executed differs depending on the combination of the figures that form the figure group Y1.

In the case where the special mode is considered as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, when executing the active display change effect on the active display corresponding to the hold display displayed in the special mode, the above-described common effect is performed. , May be executed as a suggestion effect suggesting a success effect and a failure effect, or a suggestion effect suggesting an active display change effect on an active display corresponding to a hold display displayed in a special mode (for example, a success effect and a failure effect) (A suggestion effect indicating a common effect that is commonly executed with the effect) may be executed in the same or a different manner.
In addition, when the special mode is considered as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the active display change effect for the active display has been described. However, the display mode of the hold display displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H is a special mode. In some cases, a hold change effect that is performed in a similar or different effect mode to the active display change effect may be performed on the hold display displayed in the special mode.

  In FIG. 39, among the graphic group Y1 configured by initial display (combination), the graphic to be deleted in the common effect may be deleted from the graphic having the active display mode with a low degree of expectation. For example, when the first system detailed pattern SHP6 is determined as a successful effect, a display mode after a successful effect is executed in a group of figures composed of three figures of “star”, “pentagon”, and “triangle” Among the two figures other than the figure (for example, “pentagon”), the figure with low expectation (for example, “triangle”) is deleted first, and then the figure with low expectation (for example, “star”) is deleted. If it is a failed production, in the group of figures consisting of three figures, “star”, “pentagon”, and “triangle”, “triangle”, “pentagon”, and “star” are arranged in this order. You may delete it.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment, after the game medium has passed through the start area (for example, the first start winning opening, the second start winning opening, etc.) provided in the game area, the game machine 1 is variably displayed (for example, Variable display of decoration information, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of special figures and decorative symbols, etc.), and performs variable display of identification information based on the establishment of a start condition. When a specific display result is derived and displayed on the variable display means for deriving and displaying a fixed special symbol or the like, a gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine) controlling to a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player 1), wherein the variable storage of the identification information for which the start condition of the variable display in which the game medium has passed through the start area does not satisfy the start condition is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number. For example, 1 special figure holding storage unit 151A, second special figure holding storage unit 151B, first start winning reception command buffer 194A, second start winning reception command buffer 194B, etc.) and holding stored in the holding storage means. Hold display means for performing a hold display in a predetermined display mode for each piece of information (for example, processing for adding a hold display to the first start winning storage display area 5HL in the first hold addition processing in step S162, and processing in step S165 In the second hold addition processing, processing for adding a hold display to the second start winning prize storage display area 5HR, and the like, and based on the satisfaction of the start condition of the variable display, digestion corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the variable display. The special image representing the information including the time display (for example, the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to the predetermined active display area AHA). The active display or a special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display is provided in a predetermined area (for example, an active display area AHA), for example, provided at the lower center of the image display device 5. In the display area AHA, at least the active display AH is displayed, and in addition to the active display AH, an active display frame AHW surrounding the active display AH or an area including a predetermined range including the active display frame AHW is specially displayed. An image display unit and a common effect (for example, a second effect) commonly executed when the display mode of the special image is changed during the execution of the variable display of the identification information and when the display mode of the special image is not changed. In the one-system change effect, the effect before the figure group Y1 collides with the active display, and the second-system change effect. In the rendering effect, a rendering effect until the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame surrounding the active display, and the like, and a successful rendering (for example, a first system change rendering) that changes the display mode of the special image after executing the common rendering process In the effect in which the graphic of any shape “star” of the graphic group Y1 collides with the active display and changes to the star display mode, or in the second system change effect, the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame and the active display frame is activated. An effect in which the line thickness of the display frame changes, an effect in which both the first system change effect and the second system change effect are executed to change the display mode such as the active display and the active display frame, or the above-described effect. A failure effect that does not change the display mode of the special image (for example, in the first system change effect, a figure of any shape “star” of the figure group Y1 collides with the active display. In an effect that disappears before and the display mode of the active display does not change, or in the second system change effect, the arrow Y2 disappears before the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame, and the line thickness of the active display frame is reduced. An effect execution that can execute an effect that does not change, or an effect that executes both the first system change effect and the second system change effect and does not change one or both of the active display and the active display frame). Means, the ratio of executing the successful effect differs depending on at which timing among the plurality of timings during execution of the variable display of the identification information, the variable display of the identification information. Re-variable display means for performing a predetermined number of times of re-variable display for variably displaying identification information after a temporary stop from the start of the display until the display result is derived and displayed A ratio of executing the successful effect according to at which timing the common effect is executed among a plurality of timings during execution of the variable display of the identification information including at least the timing before the temporary stop and the timing after the temporary stop. Are different from each other.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine pays attention to the execution timing of the common effect that stimulates whether to change the display mode of the special image representing the information including the display at the time of digestion according to the hold display corresponding to the variable display. Can be done. Further, the gaming machine can improve the player's expectation by paying attention to the execution timing.

  Further, in the gaming machine 1, the plurality of timings at which the common effect can be executed may include before and after a reach display mode constituting a part of the specific display result is displayed.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine can improve the player's expectation before and after the reach display mode is displayed (before and after reaching).

  Further, in the gaming machine 1, the common effect is performed at a second timing after the first timing of the variable display as compared with the case where the common effect is performed at the first timing of the variable display of the identification information being executed. When executed, the rate at which the successful effect is executed may be higher.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the player's expectation over a longer period from the first half to the second half of the variable display of the identification information being executed.

  Further, in the gaming machine 1, a pre-determining means for determining whether or not to set the specific display result before deriving and displaying the display result of the variable display (for example, in the process of step S412 by the CPU 103, the special figure display result and the hold storage) The variation category determination table to be used is selected from the plurality of variation category determination tables shown in FIG. 17 based on the number and the variation category determination table based on the selected variation category determination table and the random number value MR3 for variation category determination. , A special figure display result and a process of determining a jackpot type in the winning random number determination process in step S220), and are stored in the holding storage device before the determination by the preliminary determination device. A specific determination unit (for example, step S1) that determines whether the display result of the variable display based on the suspension information is a specific display result. 0, etc., in the special design normal process, a process of determining whether the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is "big hit" or "small hit" before the variable display result is derived and displayed) An effect executing means capable of executing a hold announcement effect of displaying a hold display corresponding to the hold information determined by the specific determination means in one of a plurality of display modes, and a display mode of the hold display. And a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect indicating whether or not to change. The display mode of the hold display is a normal mode, a special mode different from the normal mode, the normal mode and the special mode. Including a first special mode and a second special mode, which are different modes, the effect execution unit is determined by the specific determining unit at different rates according to the determination result of the specific determining unit. Pending information Is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode, and the display is changed to the first special mode or the second special mode at a plurality of timings. The suggestion effect execution means may execute the suggestion effect at a higher frequency when the hold display is displayed in the special mode than when the hold display is not displayed in the special mode. Good.

  According to such a configuration, when the display mode of the hold display is displayed in a special mode, the execution frequency of the suggestion effect can be increased, and the player's sense of expectation can be increased.

  In the above description, the active display change effect with respect to the active display has been described. However, the hold change effect, which is the same as the active display change effect, is executed for the hold display displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H. You may.

Further, the execution ratio of executing the above-described common effect as a suggestion effect indicating a successful effect and a failed effect after the hold display is displayed in a special mode as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38 may be different. After the hold display is displayed in a special mode, a suggestion effect indicating an active display change effect for the active display corresponding to the hold display (for example, a suggestion indicating a common effect executed commonly for a successful effect and a failure effect) Effect) in the same or different manners.
In addition, when the display mode of the hold display displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38 is a special mode, the active display change effect is performed with respect to the hold display displayed in the special mode. The execution ratio of executing the pending change effect executed in the same or different effect mode may be different.

  In the above description, the main notice effect such as the active display change effect is described. If there is no effect on the notice effect such as another main notice effect or a look-ahead notice effect, the main notice effect may be executed with the same fluctuation. Here, the case where there is no influence means that when a plurality of preview effects (main preview effect, look-ahead preview effect) are performed in the variation, the execution time for executing each preview effect is sufficient for the special figure variation time of the variation. Or a case in which a plurality of advance effects (main advance effect, pre-read advance effect) are executed in the variation and it is difficult for the player to see due to the effect of each advance effect.

  In the above description, the active display change effect with respect to the active display has been described. It is a decoration pattern when the display mode of the hold display is changed or when the decoration pattern is composed of eight types of alphanumeric characters "1" to "8" and one character image in total. The effect mode may be such that the character jumps out of the character image and performs an action effect on the hold display of the target.

  Note that, in the above description, the display mode at the time of addition of the hold display has been described. Alternatively, the display mode of the hold display may be determined based on a setting example of the display mode determination table of the hold display as shown in FIG. 24 or FIG. 37, and the timing of changing the display mode of the hold display may be determined. The timing for changing the display mode of the hold display may be a predetermined timing such as the next change.

  In the above description, the first mode change effect is an effect mode in which the display mode of the active display is changed by an image group composed of a combination of a plurality of figures, and the second mode change effect is the display mode of the active display frame with an arrow. Although the effect of changing the display mode has been described, the present invention is not limited to a figure or an arrow. For example, the effect is such that a character or the like appears and the display mode of a special image including an active display or an active display frame is changed. Is also good.

  In the above description, the display mode (display mode at the time of addition) of the hold display to be additionally displayed has been described as an example of a white color. However, as in the setting example using the hold display mode determination table as shown in FIGS. The display mode of the hold display is determined so that, for example, additional display is performed in one of four colors (for example, red, yellow, blue, and white) or five colors (for example, red, yellow, blue, white, and gray). The display mode of the hold display may be determined so as to be additionally displayed according to the display mode of three or less colors or the display mode of six or more colors, or the color of the hold display or the color of the hold display may be used. The display mode of the hold display may be determined so as to be additionally displayed by characters or symbols, or the hold display may be additionally displayed according to the shape of the hold display (for example, a heart shape, a star shape, a character type, etc.). Display mode May be constant, hold display of motion (for example, the operation pattern of the character in the hold display of character) may determine the hold display of the display mode to be added displayed by like.

  In the above description, the active display may be deleted from the image display device 5 immediately before the final stop of the decorative design, or the active display may be deleted when the fluctuation of the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5L is stopped. Alternatively, the active display may be deleted after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the change.

  In the above description, after performing the common effect on the active display displayed in the active display area AHA, the display mode of the special image representing information including the active display corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the variable display Has been described, an example of executing a failure effect that does not change the display mode of a special image representing information including an active display corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the variable display is performed, but the start winning storage display area 5H. After performing a common effect that is commonly performed in the success effect and the failure effect for any of the hold displays displayed in the above, the display mode of the success effect or the hold display that changes the display mode of the hold display May be executed without changing.

Further, after a successful effect or a failed effect is performed on any of the hold displays displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H, the hold display is changed to the variable display, and the hold display corresponding to the variable display is performed. A success or failure effect may be further performed on the special image representing information including the active display.
In this case, for example, when there is a start winning in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, in step 160 or step 163 in FIG. 23, each of the hold displays displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H is displayed. On the other hand, whether or not a successful or unsuccessful effect is to be performed on the hold display, the effect form, the execution timing for executing the effect, the display mode of the hold display, etc. are determined according to the fluctuation category, and further, the active display corresponding to each hold display As shown in FIG. 10, the presence / absence of success / failure effect on the special image representing the information including the active display at the time of the occurrence, the effect mode, the display mode of the special display, etc. are determined according to the fluctuation category and the like, as shown in FIG. The determined contents may be stored in the first prefetch notice buffer 194C or the second prefetch notice buffer 194D.

  In the above description, as an example, the second system change effect of the effect mode by the arrow Y2 in which the character of "hot heat" is drawn has been described, but the character may not be drawn in the arrow Y2, Characters may be drawn, characters and the like may be drawn. In addition, when there are a plurality of types of effect modes as the second system change effect, a successful effect is determined depending on which of the second system change effect effects is selected from the plurality of types of second system change effects. The degree of expectation to be executed may be different. In addition, the second system change effect may be an effect indicating the display mode of the special image after the successful effect execution, based on the effect mode of the second system change effect.

  Next, control of the lamp 9 will be described. As described above, the lamp 9 can emit light (light, blink, etc.) in a plurality of types of light emission patterns corresponding to the effect to be executed. The effect control CPU 120 can control the lamp 9 to emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in a predetermined light emission pattern when the control data is set in the control data area provided in the RAM 122. I have.

  The control data set in the control data area is data for the lamp control board 14 to control light emission (lighting, blinking, etc.). Specifically, each light emitting pattern is assigned an identifier for uniquely identifying the light emitting pattern, and the control data described above is data indicating this identifier. When control data is set in the control data area, effect control CPU 120 reads the control data and outputs the data to lamp control board 14. The lamp control board 14 controls the lamp driver circuit and the like so as to emit light in the light emission pattern identified by the identifier indicated by the control data, so that the lamp 9 is turned on / off. On the other hand, if the control data area is NULL, it is determined that no control data is set in the control data area. The timing at which the control data is set is a timing at which control is started by the control data, or a timing before the timing at which control is started by the control data. In the following description, when an effect by any one of the lamps 9 is described, the effect may be simply referred to as a lamp effect.

  FIG. 40A is a diagram illustrating an example of the control data area. The control data area includes at least one control data area and another control data area. Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, five control data areas of layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, and layer 5 are included. Each layer corresponds to a sound effect for outputting a sound. For example, the "error" effect is an effect in which a screen indicating an error is also displayed on the image display device 5, and corresponds to the effect of outputting an error sound. Note that the sound effect includes an effect that does not emit sound (silent effect), and a lamp effect corresponding to the silent effect may be present. The lamp effect corresponding to the silent effect is an effect in which the lamp is turned on instead of turning off the lamp.

  In addition, priorities are set for layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, and layer 5, and are layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, and layer 5 in ascending order of priority. Here, "priority is set" means that, specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp 9, the control is performed in the order of layer 5, layer 4, layer 3, layer 2, and layer 1. Layer 5 to determine whether or not the control data is set, and to output the control data set in the control data area determined to be set to the lamp control board 14. This indicates that priority is given in the order of layer 4, layer 3, layer 2, and layer 1. Note that the example of implementing the setting of the priority order is not limited to this. For example, a value indicating the priority order may be assigned to each layer. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 first refers to the values assigned to all the layers in which the control data is set, and selects the layer assigned the highest priority (for example, the maximum value) among them. Is output to the lamp control board 14.

  As described above, since the priority is set in the layer, only one lamp effect is performed in the lamp effect, and a plurality of lamp effects are not performed at the same time, but the sound effects corresponding to the lamp effect are simultaneously performed. May be done. For example, if the control data area for the BGM effect is set in the control data area of the layer 1 and the control data area for another effect is not set in the control data area of the layer having a higher priority than the layer 1, BGM is performed as a sound effect together with the lamp effect of the effect. In this state, for example, when control data for another effect is set in the control data area of the layer 3, in the lamp effect, the lamp effect of the BGM effect ends, and the lamp effect of another effect is performed. In the sound effect, BGM and sound effects of other effects are performed simultaneously.

  When control data is set in any one of the control data areas, effect control CPU 120 emits light (lights, illuminates, lights) in a light emission pattern corresponding to the control data area in which the control data is set. (Flashing, etc.). More specifically, for example, when the game state is the low base state, as shown in FIG. 40A, when the control data is set in the layer 1, the BGM effect of the layer 1 (normal fluctuation, reach fluctuation) ) Is controlled so that the lamp 9 emits light (lights up, blinks, etc.) in a light emission pattern corresponding to the above. When the control data is set in Layer 2, the control is performed so that the lamp 9 emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in a light emission pattern corresponding to the notice B effect of Layer 2. When the control data is set in Layer 3, the control is performed so that the lamp 9 emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in a light emission pattern corresponding to the notice A effect of Layer 3. When the control data is set in the layer 4, the control is performed so that the lamp 9 emits light (lights, blinks, and the like) in a light emission pattern corresponding to the final notification effect of the layer 4. When the control data is set in the layer 5, the control is performed so that the lamp 9 emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in a light emission pattern corresponding to the error effect of the layer 5.

  Further, when the control state is set in the layer 1 as shown in FIG. 40A when the game state is the high base state, the light emission pattern corresponding to the BGM effect (normal fluctuation) of the layer 1 Is controlled so that the lamp 9 emits light (lights, blinks, etc.). When the control data is set in Layer 2, the control is performed so that the lamp 9 emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in an emission pattern corresponding to the BGM effect (reach variation) of Layer 2. When the control data is set in the layer 3, the control is performed so that the lamp 9 emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in an emission pattern corresponding to the announcement effect (all) of the layer 3. When the control data is set in the layer 4, the control is performed so that the lamp 9 emits light (lights, blinks, and the like) in a light emission pattern corresponding to the final notification effect of the layer 4. When the control data is set in the layer 5, the control is performed so that the lamp 9 emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in a light emission pattern corresponding to the error effect of the layer 5.

  Further, when the gaming state is the big hit state, as shown in FIG. 40A, when the control data is set in the layer 1, the light emitting pattern corresponding to the BGM effect (big hit) of the layer 1 is used. Control is performed so that the lamp 9 emits light (lights, blinks, etc.). When the control data is set in Layer 2, the control is performed so that the lamp 9 emits light (lights, blinks, and the like) in a light emission pattern corresponding to the announcement effect of the layer 2 (holding sequence, promotion). . When the control data is set in Layer 3, the control is performed so that the lamp 9 emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in an emission pattern corresponding to the special winning opening winning effect of Layer 3. Further, when the control data is set in the layer 4, the control is performed so that the lamp 9 emits light (lights up, blinks, etc.) in a light emission pattern corresponding to the certain change winning prize effect of the layer 4. When the control data is set in the layer 5, the control is performed so that the lamp 9 emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in a light emission pattern corresponding to the error effect of the layer 5.

  When control data is set in both control data areas, effect control CPU 120 emits light (lights, blinks) in a light emission pattern corresponding to the control data area set to a higher priority. Etc.). Specifically, for example, when the control data is set in both the control data areas of the layer 2 and the layer 3, the light emission pattern corresponding to the layer 3 which is the control data area with a higher priority is set. The lamp 9 can be controlled to emit light (light, blink, etc.). Further, when the control data is set in the control data areas of Layer 2, Layer 3 and Layer 4, the lamp has a light emission pattern corresponding to Layer 4 which is the control data area set with a higher priority. 9 can be controlled to emit light (light, blink, etc.).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the light emission pattern when the control data is set in one control data area during the first game state, and the one light emission pattern during the second game state different from the first game state. The light emission pattern when the control data is set in the data area is different. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 40A, the control data area is provided for each gaming state (low base state, high base state, big hit state). Then, for example, during the low base state, for example, a light emission pattern when the control data is set in the control data area of layer 2 (a light emission pattern corresponding to the notice A effect) is different from the low base state, for example, a high base state The light emission pattern (light emission pattern corresponding to the BGM effect) when the control data is set in the control data area of the layer 2 is different.

  The setting in the control data area shown in FIG. 40A is reset in principle each time one game ends. "One game" means a game starting from the start of the variable display when the gaming state is the low base state or the high base state and ending by the stop display of the variable display, and when the gaming state is the big hit state Indicates a game from the start to the end of the big hit state.

  Therefore, when the gaming state is the low base state or the high base state, the control data is set at the start timing of the variable display or the start timing of the effect during the variable display, and is determined for each variable display stop display or each effect. Reset at the timing when the elapsed time has elapsed. Note that, even when the timing at which the time set for each effect has elapsed does not arrive, the variable display is reset when the variable display is stopped.

  When the gaming state is the big hit state, the control data is set in the special figure hit waiting process in S173 or the big hit middle rendering process in S176, and when the big hit ends, the round ends, or The reset is performed at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  The setting of the control data of the ramp effect by the lamp 9 corresponding to the effect performed over a plurality of games in an exceptional manner (for example, the pre-reading notice effect described above or the effect including a plurality of big hits) is set by the end of the game. It will not be reset. The details of the ramp effect performed over a plurality of games will be described later. In addition, the ramp effect performed over a plurality of games, a combination of one game that is different depending on the above-mentioned game state is re-defined as one game, and the effect that extends over a plurality of the one game is also a ramp effect. Good.

  Next, each effect shown in FIG. 40 (A) will be described. As described above, the lamp control in the present embodiment corresponds to the sound effect in each effect illustrated in FIG. In the following description, a lamp that emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) is described in each effect. Blinking).

  In FIG. 40 (A), the error effect includes an error image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an error sound output operation from the speaker 8 and a lamp corresponding to the error designation command transmitted from the main board 11. 9 is an effect in which an error notification or the like is performed by an error light emission operation or the like in FIG. The error effect in the present embodiment is an effect in which all of the lamps 9 emit light (light, blink, and the like). Then, as shown in FIG. 40 (A), when control data is set in the control data area (layer 5) in which the highest priority is set, the effect control CPU 120 sets the gaming state. Is controlled so as to emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in a light emitting pattern indicating an error effect regardless of the image.

  The final notification effect is an effect in which a V-shaped lamp or a lamp on which a V-shaped lamp is blinking or a V-shaped design is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. The jackpot to be performed is an effect (preliminary notice) indicating confirmation. Further, the final notification effect is not limited to the V-shape, but includes an effect in which the light emitting member blinks. The confirmation notification effect in the present embodiment is an effect in which the light emitting member 9U blinks.

  In the certainty winning prize production, for example, a V certain variation type gaming machine in which the state after the big hit is determined based on the presence or absence of winning in the certainty winning prize mouth (or a predetermined area provided in the certainty winning prize mouth; hereinafter, the certainty winning prize mouth or the like). Is an effect performed when a prize is awarded to a certain change winning prize port or the like. In general, when a winning is made in a certain-variable winning opening or the like, the state after the big hit is made into a certain-variable state, and when no winning is made in the certain-variable winning opening or the like, the state after the big hit is made a non-probable state. In this case, an effect is provided for the player to aim for a prize in the probability change winning opening and the like, and this effect is referred to as a probability change challenge effect in this embodiment. Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 is not provided with a certain-variable winning prize port, in order to explain an example of lamp control, a certain-variable winning prize effect in the present embodiment is performed, for example, in the special variable prize ball device 7. The light emitting members 9ATR and 9ATL emit light (light, blink, etc.) when the predetermined area is provided. In the present embodiment, the positive change challenge effect is an effect in which the light emitting members 9ATR and 9ATL emit light (light up, blink, and the like). In addition, this probability change winning opening is also called a probability change attacker.

  In this embodiment, the notice A effect and the notice B effect are effects in which the light emitting members 9CC, 9CR, and 9CL emit light (light up, blink, and the like) and are in the display area of the image display device 5. The A effect is an effect in which the character A is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and the notice B effect is an effect in which the character B is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. "Preliminary notice (all)" indicates a notice A effect and a notice B effect. In the “notification (holding reams, promotion)”, the reminding (holding reams) has a jackpot hold when there is a jackpot hold in a hold held before or during a jackpot. It is a production that foretells you during a big hit. The advance notice (promotion) is the promotion promotion during the above-described jackpot or the promotion of the number of rounds in which the number of jackpot rounds increases from eight rounds to sixteen rounds, for example. The “notification (reserved series, promotion)” is an effect in the display area of the image display device 5 while the light emitting members 9CC, 9CR, and 9CL emit light (turn on, blink, and the like).

  The special winning opening winning effect is an effect performed when the special variable winning ball device 7 is won. The special winning opening winning effect in the present embodiment is an effect in which the light emitting members 9ATR and 9ATL emit light (light on, blink, etc.) every time a special winning prize ball device 7 is won. In the special winning opening winning effect, an effect that is particularly conspicuous at the time of so-called over winning may be performed.

  In each of the above-described effects, not only the effect of the lamp effect, but also effects other than the lamp effect (for example, sound effects by sound, display effects by the image display device 5, or effects in which the sound effects and the display effects are combined). Although it may be performed, in the following description, unless otherwise specified, the “effect” indicates only a lamp effect in the effect. When the entire effect including the lamp effect and the effect other than the lamp is indicated, it is expressed as “effect (all)”. Further, when an effect other than a lamp is indicated, it is expressed as “effect (other than a lamp)”. For example, "BGM effect" indicates only a lamp effect, and "BGM effect (all)" indicates an entire effect including a sound effect and other effects other than a lamp effect in addition to a lamp effect, and "BGM effect (other than a lamp)". Indicates an effect other than a lamp, such as a sound effect.

  Further, in each of the effects described above, the priority of the BGM effect is set lowest in any game state due to the nature of the BGM. In the low base state, the notice A effect has a higher priority than the notice B effect, because the notice A effect is an effect with a higher jackpot than the notice B effect. Further, in the low base state, the confirmed notification effect has a higher priority than the notice A effect, because the confirmed information effect is an effect indicating a jackpot determination.

  In the high base state, the BGM (reach variation) production has a higher priority than the BGM (normal) production, but this is because the BGM (reach variation) production has a higher expectation of a big hit than the BGM (normal) production. It is. In the high base state, the announcement (all) production has a higher priority than the BGM (reach variation) production, but this is because the announcement (all) production is a production with higher expectation of big hit than the BGM (reach variation) production. It is. In the high base state, the confirmed notification effect has a higher priority than the notice (all) effect, because the confirmed information effect is an effect with a higher expectation of a big hit than the notice (all) effect.

  In the big hit state, the notice (holding sequence, promotion) production has a higher priority than the BGM (big hit) production, but this is a production in which the notice (holding sequence, promotion) is more important to the player than the BGM (big success) production. That's why. In the jackpot state, the special winning opening prize production has a higher priority than the announcement (reserved rendezvous, promotion) production. In general, the effect (other than the lamp) is an effect that is performed relatively longer than the special winning opening winning effect in the display area of the image display device 5, and the special winning opening winning effect is announced (holding, promotion) from the effect. If the priority is set higher, any of the effects can be notified to the player. However, if the priority of the notice (holding, promotion) production is made higher than that of the special winning opening winning effect, the notice (holding) This is because only the rendition (promotion, promotion) effect is performed, and the special winning opening winning effect is not performed. In addition, as described above, in the case of the special winning opening prize production, it is common that the production at the time of the over prize is performed. Since the over prize is a profit that can not be obtained originally for the player, the importance of the production is important. It is also because of the high.

  The setting of the control data of each effect is reset after the time set for each effect has elapsed, except for the control data of the effect performed over a BGM effect and a plurality of games. In addition, as an effect (all) in a general pachinko gaming machine, there is an effect (all) that branches into two or more effects (all). For example, in the effect (all) shown in FIG. 29B, the effect branches to an effect (all) that changes the display mode of the special image, such as “extremely thick”, and an effect (all) that does not change. Also, the confrontation effect is a general effect (all), and in this case, the effect branches to a winning effect (all) and a defeat effect (all). When branching to such a plurality of effects (all), the control data of the corresponding effect is reset when branching.

  Next, FIG. 40 (B) shows that in one game state, the first control data is set in a control data area having a higher priority than the second control data, and a game state different from the one game state is set. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example in which the first control data is set in a control data area having a lower priority than the second control data.

  Specifically, it is assumed that control data is set in the control data area as shown in FIG. 40A during the low base state, and as shown in FIG. 40B during the high base state. It is assumed that control data is set in the control data area.

  At this time, during the low base state, the control data for the notice A effect (set in layer 3) is set in the control data area having a higher priority than the control data for the notice B effect (set in layer 2). ing. Then, during the high base state, the control data for the notice A effect (set in layer 2) is set in the control data area having a lower priority than the control data for the notice B effect (set in layer 3). I have. That is, the priority is reversed depending on the game state.

  As described above, the notice can be executed in the priority order according to the game state, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  The control data set in each control data area described above is an example, and is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 40, and is appropriately set according to the effect of the pachinko gaming machine or the like.

  FIG. 41 is a time chart illustrating an example of lamp control. In the time chart shown in FIG. 41, in a state in which the gaming state is a low base state, no variable display is performed, and there is no hold, there is a start winning at time T1, the decoration symbol starts to change, and the time T2 is changed. Shows a time chart when a notice B effect occurs at time T3 and a notice A effect occurs at time T3. Note that the BGM effect (other than the ramp) is performed from time T1 to the end, the notice B effect (other than the lamp) is performed from time T2 to the end, and the notice A effect (other than the lamp) is performed from time T3 to the end. Have been done. The control target lamp is, for example, a light emitting member 9CC.

  In the time chart shown in FIG. 41, the vertical axis indicates lamp control corresponding to each layer, and the horizontal axis indicates time.

  In FIG. 41, the control data set in the control data area of layer 5 is used as the control data of the error effect, and the control data set in the control data area of layer 4 is used for the control of the definite notification effect. The control data set in the control data area of the layer 3 is used as control data of the notice A effect, and the control data set in the control data area of the layer 2 is used as the control data of the notice B effect. The control data set in the control data area of the layer 1 is used as the control data for the BGM effect.

  The light emitting member 9CC emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in color A in an error effect, emits light in color B (lighting, blinking, etc.) in a confirmed notification effect, and emits light in color C (lighting, blinking, etc.) in a notice A effect. Then, in the notice B effect, light emission (lighting, blinking, etc.) is performed in the color D, and in the BGM effect light emission (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the color E.

  In addition, the time chart illustrated in FIG. 41 illustrates a display mode indicating the emission color and the like of the light emitting member 9CC. In this display mode, “OFF” indicates that the light-emitting member 9CC is turned off, and the alphabet indicates that the light-emitting member 9CC is emitting light (lighting, blinking, and the like) in the corresponding color. The expression “era” and the alphabet are also used in other time charts described below.

  Further, in the time chart shown in FIG. 41, whether or not an effect (other than a ramp) corresponding to each layer is being executed is indicated by a solid line (during execution) and a broken line (during stop). For example, since the BGM effect (all) is an effect in which a sound effect is executed together with a lamp effect, a sound effect can be executed even when the priority is low and the lamp effect is not executed. The meanings of the solid line and the broken line are used in other time charts with the same meaning.

  In the case of FIG. 41, each effect (other than the ramp) can be executed simultaneously. For example, the notice A effect (other than the lamp) and the notice B effect (other than the lamp) can be executed simultaneously.

  Based on the above, the time chart of FIG. 41 will be described. First, since no control data is set in each control data area, the light emitting member 9CC is turned off as shown in the lamp display mode.

  At time T1, there is a winning start, and the control data is set in the control data area of layer 1, whereby the BGM lamp control is turned on. Thereby, the light emitting member 9CC emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in the color E as shown in the lamp display mode.

  Next, at time T2, the control data is set in the control data area of the layer 2 having a higher priority than the layer 1, so that the advance B lamp control is turned on and the BGM lamp control is turned off. Accordingly, the light emitting member 9CC emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in the color D as shown in the lamp display mode.

  Next, at time T3, the control data is set in the control data area of the layer 3 having a higher priority than the layer 2, so that the notice A lamp control is turned on and the notice B lamp control is turned off. As a result, the light emitting member 9CC emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in the color C as shown in the lamp display mode. According to the control shown in FIG. 41, the notice B effect that is important to the player is given priority over the BGM effect, and the notice A effect that is more important than the notice B effect is given priority. Since a visual effect can be appropriately given, the interest of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 42 is a time chart illustrating an example of lamp control. In the time chart shown in FIG. 42, in the state where the gaming state is the high base state, the variable display is not performed, and there is no hold, there is a start winning at time T1, the decoration symbol starts to change, and the time T2 At the time T3, and the fluctuation display ends at time T3. The normal fluctuation effect (other than the ramp) is performed from time T1 to T2, and the reach fluctuation effect (other than the ramp) is performed from time T2 to T3. The control target lamp is, for example, a light emitting member 9CC.

  In the time chart shown in FIG. 42, the vertical axis represents effect control corresponding to each layer, and the horizontal axis represents time.

  FIG. 42 shows the control data set in the control data areas of the layer 1 and the layer 2, and the layers 3, 4, and 5 are omitted. Then, the control data set in the control data area of the layer 2 is used as the control data of the reach variation effect, and the control data set in the control data area of the layer 1 is used as the control data of the normal variation effect. .

  The light emitting member 9CC emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the color A in the reach fluctuation effect, and emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the color B in the normal fluctuation effect.

  Based on the above, the time chart of FIG. 42 will be described. First, since no control data is set in each control data area, the light emitting member 9CC is turned off as shown in the lamp display mode.

  In this state, at time T1, the control data is set in the control data area of the layer 1, so that the normal variable ramp control is turned on. Thereby, the light emitting member 9CC emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in the color B as shown in the lamp display mode.

  Next, at time T2, the reach variation ramp control is turned on and the normal variation ramp control is turned off by setting the control data in the control data area of layer 2 having a higher priority than layer 1. Thereby, the light emitting member 9CC emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in the color A as shown in the lamp display mode.

  Next, at time T3, the fluctuation display is stopped, the reach fluctuation effect ends, and the setting of the control data in the control data area of the layer 2 is reset, so that the reach fluctuation lamp control is turned off. Become. Thereby, the light emitting member 9CC is turned off as shown in the lamp display mode. According to the control shown in FIG. 42, the reach fluctuation effect that is important to the player is given priority over the normal fluctuation effect, so that the visual effect of each lamp effect can be appropriately given to the player. Can be improved.

  FIG. 43 is a time chart illustrating an example of lamp control. In the time chart shown in FIG. 43, in the state where the gaming state is the high base state and the variable display is being performed, the notice B effect occurs at time T1, the notice B effect ends at time T2, and the notice B effect ends at time T3. A time chart is shown in the case where the A effect occurs, the notice A effect ends at time T4, the final notification effect occurs at time T5, and the final notification effect ends at time T6. The BGM effect (other than the ramp) is performed from the beginning to the end, the notice B effect (other than the lamp) is performed from time T1 to the end, and the notice A effect (other than the lamp) is performed from time T3 to the end. The notification effect (other than the lamp) is performed from time T5 to T6. The control target lamp is, for example, a light emitting member 9CC.

  In the time chart shown in FIG. 43, the vertical axis represents effect control corresponding to each layer, and the horizontal axis represents time.

  In FIG. 43, the control data set in the control data area of layer 5 is used as the control data of the error effect, and the control data set in the control data area of layer 4 is used for the control of the final notification effect. The control data set in the control data area of the layer 3 is the control data of the notice B effect, and the control data set in the control data area of the layer 2 is the control data of the notice A effect. The control data set in the control data area of the layer 1 is used as the control data for the BGM effect. In this case, the priorities of the notice A effect and the notice B effect shown in FIG. 40B are reversed.

  The light emitting member 9CC emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the color A in the error effect, emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the color B in the confirmation notification effect, and emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the color C in the notice B effect. Then, in the notice A effect, light emission (lighting, blinking, etc.) is performed in the color D, and in the BGM effect light emission (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the color E.

  In the case of FIG. 43, each effect (other than the ramp) can be executed simultaneously. For example, the notice A effect (other than the lamp) and the notice B effect (other than the lamp) can be executed simultaneously. Note that the notice A effect (other than the ramp) and the notice B effect (other than the ramp) are executed to the end when the execution is started, but may be ended halfway.

  Based on the above, the time chart of FIG. 43 will be described. First, since the control data is set in the control data area of Layer 1, the BGM lamp control is on. Thereby, the light emitting member 9CC emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in the color E as shown in the lamp display mode.

  In this state, at the time T1, the control data is set in the control data area of the layer 3 having a higher priority than the layer 1, so that the advance B lamp control is turned on and the BGM lamp control is turned off. As a result, the light emitting member 9CC emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in the color C as shown in the lamp display mode.

  Next, at time T2, the setting of the control data in the control data area of the layer 3 is reset, whereby the notice B lamp control is turned off and the BGM lamp control is turned on. Thereby, the light emitting member 9CC emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in the color E as shown in the lamp display mode.

  Next, at time T3, the control data is set in the control data area of Layer 2, which has a higher priority than Layer 1, so that the advance A lamp control is turned on and the BGM lamp control is turned off. Accordingly, the light emitting member 9CC emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in the color D as shown in the lamp display mode.

  Next, at time T4, the setting of the control data in the control data area of the layer 2 is reset, whereby the notice A lamp control is turned off and the BGM lamp control is turned on. Thereby, the light emitting member 9CC emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in the color E as shown in the lamp display mode.

  Next, at time T5, the control data is set in the control data area of Layer 4, which has a higher priority than Layer 1, so that the fixed notification lamp control is turned on and the BGM lamp control is turned off. Thereby, the light emitting member 9CC emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in the color B as shown in the lamp display mode.

  Next, at time T6, the setting of the control data in the control data area of the layer 4 is reset, so that the fixed notification lamp control is turned off and the BGM lamp control is turned on. Thereby, the light emitting member 9CC emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in the color E as shown in the lamp display mode. According to the control shown in FIG. 43, the advance notice B effect and the advance notice A effect that are important to the player are prioritized over the BGM effect, and the important final notice effect is prioritized over the advance notice B effect and the advance notice A effect. Since the visual effect of each lamp effect can be appropriately given to the player, the interest of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 44 is a time chart illustrating an example of lamp control. The time chart shown in FIG. 44 shows that the gaming state is a big hit state and the BGM effect is being performed, a probable change challenge effect occurs at time T1, and during the probable change effect effect, a special winning opening prize at time T2. At the time T3, the big winning opening prize production ends, at time T4, the positive change challenge production ends, at the same time, the large winning opening prize production occurs, and at the time T5, the positive change prize production occurs, and at time T6. Shows a time chart when the winning change prize production is completed. The BGM effect (other than the ramp) is performed from the beginning to the end, the probable change challenge effect (other than the lamp) is performed from time T1 to T4, the probable change prize effect (other than the lamp) is performed from time T5 to T6, Meanwhile, a special winning opening effect (other than a ramp) is performed each time a special winning opening is won. The control target lamps are, for example, light emitting members 9ATL and 9ATR installed at the left and right positions of the special variable winning ball device 7.

  In the time chart shown in FIG. 44, the vertical axis represents effect control corresponding to each layer, and the horizontal axis represents time.

  In FIG. 44, the control data set in the control data area of the layer 5 is used as the control data of the error effect, and the control data set in the control data area of the layer 4 is used as the control data of the positive change prize effect. The control data set in the control data area of the layer 3 is used as the control data for the special winning opening winning effect, and the control data set in the control data area of the layer 2 is used for controlling the positive change challenge effect. As the data, the control data set in the control data area of the layer 1 is the control data for the BGM effect.

  The light emitting members 9ATL and 9ATR emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in color A in the error effect, emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the color B in the positive change winning effect, and emit light (lighting) in the color C in the special winning opening winning effect. , Blinking, etc.), emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in the color D in the probable change challenge effect, and emits lights (lights, blinks, etc.) in the color E in the BGM effect.

  In the case of FIG. 44, the effect other than the lamp effect included in the BGM effect and the effect other than the lamp effect included in the positive change challenge effect can be simultaneously executed. An effect other than the lamp effect included in the BGM effect and an effect other than the lamp effect included in the positive change winning effect can be simultaneously executed.

  Based on the above, the time chart of FIG. 44 will be described. First, since the control data is set in the control data area of Layer 1, the BGM lamp control is on. As a result, the light emitting members 9ATL and 9ATR emit light (light on, blink, etc.) in the color E as shown in the lamp display mode.

  In the case of FIG. 44, since the big hit state is established, a prize to the special variable prize ball device 7 is generated at any time. Each time the special variable winning prize ball device 7 is won, the light emitting members 9ATR and 9ATL are displayed in the color C as a special winning opening winning effect unless the control data is set in the control data area of a layer larger than the layer 3. It emits light (lights, blinks, etc.).

  In such a state, at time T1, the control data is set in the control data area of the layer 2 having a higher priority than the layer 1, and the probable change challenge lamp control is turned on. As a result, the light emitting members 9ATR and 9ATL emit light (light, blink, etc.) in the color D as shown in the lamp display mode.

  Next, at time T2, the control data is set in the control data area of Layer 3, which has a higher priority than Layer 2, so that the special winning opening winning lamp control is turned on and the probability change challenge lamp control is turned off. . As a result, the light emitting members 9ATR and 9ATL emit light (light, blink, etc.) in the color C as shown in the lamp display mode.

  Next, at time T3, the setting of the control data in the control data area of the layer 3 is reset, so that the special winning opening winning lamp control is turned off and the certainty changing challenge lamp control is turned on. As a result, the light emitting members 9ATR and 9ATL emit light (light, blink, etc.) in the color D as shown in the lamp display mode.

  Next, at time T4, the setting of the control data in the control data area of the layer 2 is reset, so that the probable variable challenge lamp control is turned off, but a prize is generated in the special variable prize ball device 7. Therefore, by setting the control data in the control data area of the layer 3, the special winning opening winning lamp control is turned on. As a result, the light emitting members 9ATR and 9ATL emit light (light, blink, etc.) in the color C as shown in the lamp display mode. In this probable change challenge, it is assumed that a prize is won in the probable change winning opening.

  Next, at time T5, the control data is set in the control data area of Layer 4, which has a higher priority than Layer 1 and Layer 3, so that the certain-variable winning lamp control is turned on, and the BGM lamp control and the special winning opening The winning lamp control is turned off. As a result, the light emitting members 9ATR and 9ATL emit light (light, blink, etc.) in the color B as shown in the lamp display mode.

  Next, at time T6, the setting of the control data in the control data area of the layer 4 is reset, so that the probable variable winning lamp control is turned off, but a winning in the special variable winning ball device 7 occurs. Therefore, by setting the control data in the control data area of the layer 3, the special winning opening winning lamp control is turned on. As a result, the light emitting members 9ATR and 9ATL emit light (light, blink, etc.) in the color C as shown in the lamp display mode. According to the control shown in FIG. 44, it is possible to achieve both the visual effect of the probable change challenge effect and the special winning opening winning effect, and to give priority to the positive changing winning effect important to the player over the special winning opening winning effect. Therefore, the visual effect of each lamp effect can be appropriately given to the player, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the embodiment described above, one control data is set in the control data area of one layer. However, an embodiment in which a plurality of different control data are set will be described.

  When the number of control data set in the control data area of one layer is one, the maximum number of control data that can be set is the number of layers, and the effect patterns are limited. In the present embodiment, a plurality of control data can be set in the control data area of one layer.

  In this case, since one control data area is shared, a priority flag is provided to control the lamp control of a relatively important effect with priority. This priority flag is stored in the RAM 122. When the flag is on, setting of new control data is prohibited, and the control data that is currently set has priority. When the priority flag is off, setting of new control data is not prohibited. Therefore, when the priority flag is off, new control data can be set, and when new control data is set, light is emitted in a lamp pattern corresponding to the set control data. Becomes An example of the timing at which the priority flag is turned on is the timing at which the most important effect is performed among the control data set in the shared control data area.

  By providing this priority flag, when control data is set in one control data area, setting of new control data in the one control data area can be prohibited. It has become. The “new control data” includes not only control data different from the currently set control data, but also the currently set control data. For example, when the control data of the notice α effect is set, it is prohibited to set the control data of the notice β effect and to reset the control data of the notice α effect.

  FIG. 45 is a time chart illustrating an example of lamp control. The ramp control example shown in FIG. 45 shows a control example in which the control data of the notice α and the control data of the notice β are set in the control data area of the same layer. When different control data is set in the control data area of the same layer, different control data is set to distinguish the control data.

  Based on the above, a description will be given of a time chart showing an example of the lamp control in FIG. In the time chart shown in FIG. 45, when the gaming state is the low base state, a notice α effect occurs at time T1, during the notice α effect, a notice β effect occurs at time T2, and a notice α effect occurs at time T3. The time chart at the time of completion is shown. Also, during the notice α effect, the priority flag is on. Note that the notice α effect (other than the ramp) is performed from time T1 to T3, and the notice β effect (other than the lamp) is not performed. The control target lamp is, for example, a light emitting member 9CC.

  In the time chart shown in FIG. 45, the vertical axis represents effect control corresponding to the same layer (layer 2 as an example), and the horizontal axis represents time. Further, in FIG. 45, the control data set in the control data area of Layer 2 is the control data of the notice α effect and the notice β effect. The light emitting member 9CC emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in the color A in the notice α effect, and emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in the color B in the notice β effect. In addition, the notice α effect (other than the lamp) and the notice β effect (other than the lamp) can be simultaneously executed.

  In FIG. 45, since no control data is set in the control data area corresponding to layer 2, the light emitting member 9CC is turned off as shown in the lamp display mode.

  In this state, at time T1, the control data is set in the control data area of Layer 2 and the priority flag is turned on, whereby the advance notice α lamp control is turned on. Thereby, the light emitting member 9CC emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in the color A as shown in the lamp display mode.

  Next, at time T2, the timing at which the control data of the notice β is set in the control data area of the layer 2 which is the same layer comes, but since the priority flag is on, the control of the notice β Since the setting of the data is prohibited, the advance β ramp control remains off.

  Next, at time T3, the setting of the control data of the notice α effect in the control data area of the layer 2 is reset, and the notice α effect lamp control is turned off. Thereby, the light emitting member 9CC is turned off as shown in the lamp display mode. Although FIG. 45 shows an example in which the notice β effect is not performed even when the notice α effect ends, the notice β effect may be started at the same time as the end of the notice α effect. According to the control shown in FIG. 45, since a plurality of control data can be set in the control data area of one layer, the lamp effect can be diversified even in a limited control data area. Interest can be improved. Furthermore, since the effect according to the priority can be performed by the priority flag, the visual effect of each lamp effect can be appropriately given to the player, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 46 is a time chart illustrating an example of lamp control. In the lamp control example shown in FIG. 46, when control data is set, a control data area where control of the lamp 9 by the effect control CPU 120 ends when one game ends, and control data are set. In this case, a control example is shown in which a control data area in which the control of the lamp 9 by the effect control CPU 120 is continued regardless of whether or not one game has ended.

  Specifically, in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1, one game starts with the start of the variable display and ends with the stop display of the variable display. Therefore, when the variable display is stopped, the control of the lamp 9 ends. And a control data area in which the control of the lamp 9 is continued regardless of whether the variable display is stopped or not. In the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1, as an effect that ends with the stop display of the variable display, a notice effect for the change or the like is given, and as an effect that continues regardless of whether or not the variable display is stopped, a hold effect or the like is given. Therefore, in FIG. 46, an example of the advance notice α effect is described as an effect that ends with the stop display of the variable display, and a hold effect is illustrated as an example of an effect that continues regardless of whether the variable display is stopped and displayed.

  In the time charts shown in FIGS. 46 (A) and 46 (B), the vertical axis indicates effect control corresponding to the layer, and the horizontal axis indicates time.

  In the time chart shown in FIG. 46 (A), in the state where the gaming state is the low base state and there is no hold, there is a start winning at time T1, along with the announcement α effect, and at time T2 the decorative symbol The time chart shows a case in which the fluctuation of is ended, the notice α effect ends at the same time, and there is a start winning at time T3. Note that the announcement α effect (other than the ramp) is performed from time T1 to T2. The control target lamp is, for example, a light emitting member 9CC. The light emitting member 9CC emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in the color A. It is assumed that the control data for the notice α effect is set in the control data area of Layer 2 as an example.

  Based on the above, the time chart in FIG. The time chart of FIG. 46A shows a case where the control is started from a state where there is no hold. Therefore, since the control data is not set in the control data area corresponding to the layer 2, As shown in the display mode, the light emitting member 9CC is turned off.

  Next, at time T1, when a winning start occurs, the variable display starts, and a notice α effect for the change occurs, the control data is set in the control data area of the layer 2, and the notice α lamp is set. The control is turned on. Thereby, the light emitting member 9CC emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in the color A as shown in the lamp display mode.

  Next, at time T2, when the advance notice α effect ends along with the end of the variable display, the setting of the control data in the control data area of the layer 2 is reset, and the advance notice α lamp control is turned off. Thereby, the light emitting member 9CC is turned off as shown in the lamp display mode.

  Next, at time T3, there is a start winning, and the variable display starts. However, at this time, since the control data has not been set in the control data area of the layer 2, the light is emitted as shown in the lamp display mode. The member 9CC remains off. In the example of FIG. 46 (A), the notice α lamp control is turned on with a start winning as a trigger. However, in general, the trigger for starting the notice effect is not limited to the start winning, so that it is turned on in accordance with the notice effect. Is determined.

The lamp control example shown in FIG. 46 (B) shows a control example in the case where an effect (holding effect) that continues regardless of whether or not the variable display is stopped is displayed. A light-emitting member 9H for emitting (lighting, blinking, etc.) the board near the winning ball device 6A and the normally variable winning ball device 6B is provided. When the hold display is displayed in any of white, yellow, green, and red, for example, the light emitting member 9H is turned off when white, and emits light in the same color (color X) other than white (see color X). Lighting, blinking, etc.). It is assumed that the control data of the pending effect is set in the control data area of Layer 1 as an example.
The time chart shown in FIG. 46 (B) shows that the gaming state is the low base state, the state is variably displayed, and there is one hold of white color. Along with this, a hold display effect is generated, and the variation of the decorative symbols is finished at time T2, and a time chart is shown in a case where there is a start winning at time T3. The holding effect (other than the ramp) is performed from the beginning to the end.

  Based on the above, the time chart in FIG. 46B will be described. First, since the reserved color is white, no control data is set in the control data area corresponding to layer 1, so that the light emitting member 9CC is turned off as shown in the lamp display mode.

  In this state, at time T1, there is a start winning, and when the hold display is displayed in color X, the hold data control is set in the control data area of layer 1 and the hold lamp control is turned on. . Accordingly, the light emitting member 9CC emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in the color X as shown in the lamp display mode.

  Next, at time T2, even if the advance notice α effect ends at the same time as the end of the variable display, the control data in the control data area of the layer 1 is still set, so the hold lamp control remains ON. Thereby, the light emitting member 9H continues to emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the color X as shown in the lamp display mode.

  Next, at time T3, the variable display corresponding to the suspension of white starts, but also at this time, since the control data is set in the control data area of Layer 1, light emission is performed as shown in the lamp display mode. The member 9H continues to emit light (light, blink, etc.) in the color X. The light emission (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the color X continues until the variable display of the hold corresponding to the color X starts or ends. As described above, even when the variable display ends, the light emission (lighting, blinking, etc.) may be continued without resetting the control data setting. According to the control shown in FIG. 46, a ramp effect can be performed over a plurality of games, so that interest in the games can be improved.

  FIG. 47 is a time chart illustrating an example of lamp control. The time chart shown in FIG. 47 shows a control example in the case of executing a light-off effect, in which a round is started at a time T1 and a round is performed at a time T2 in a state where the gaming state is a big hit state and a BGM effect is being performed. Is completed, and the round is started again at time T3. In addition, during the period from the start of the round to the end of the round, a special winning opening winning effect is generated. Note that the BGM effect (other than the ramp) is performed from the beginning to the end, and the light-off effect is performed from the time T1 to T2 and from the time T3 to the end. Except) has been done. The control target lamps are, for example, light emitting members 9ATL and 9ATR installed at the left and right positions of the special variable winning ball device 7. The light-off effect is an effect that is executed when light-off control data for controlling the lamp 9 to be turned off is set in the control data area.

  In the time chart shown in FIG. 47, the vertical axis represents effect control corresponding to each layer, and the horizontal axis represents time.

  In FIG. 47, the control data set in the control data area of the layer 5 is used as the control data of the error effect, and the control data set in the control data area of the layer 4 is used for the control of the certain change winning prize effect. Control data set in the control data area of Layer 3 as control data of a special winning opening prize production effect; control data set in the control data area of Layer 2 is turned off control data; The control data set in the control data area of Layer 1 is used as the control data for the BGM effect. The layer 2 is not limited to the light-off control data, and control data for controlling the light-emitting members 9ATL and 9ATR to emit light (turn on, blink, and the like) can also be set.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the first data area (the control data area of the layer 1), the second data area (the control data area of the layer 2), and the A 3 data area (control data area of Layer 3) is provided, and the lamp 9 emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) as control data set in the second data area (control data area of Layer 2). There is control data for controlling to turn off the lamp 9 and control data for turning off the lamp 9. The control data (for controlling the BGM effect) is stored in the first data area (control data area of layer 1). When the data is set, the light-off control data is set in the second data area (layer 2). When the light-off control data is set, the third data area (layer 3 control data) is set. It has become possible to set the control data (control data of the special winning opening winning director) to over data area).

  The light emitting members 9ATL and 9ATR emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in color A in the error effect, emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the color B in the positive change winning effect, and emit light (lighting) in the color C in the special winning opening winning effect. , Blinking, etc.), turn off the light in the light-off effect, and emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the color E in the BGM effect.

  Based on the above, the time chart of FIG. 47 will be described. First, since the control data is set in the control data area of Layer 1, the BGM lamp control is on. As a result, the light emitting members 9ATL and 9ATR emit light (light on, blink, etc.) in the color E as shown in the lamp display mode.

  In the case of FIG. 47, since the state is a big hit state, when the round starts, a prize to the special variable prize ball device 7 occurs at any time. Each time the special variable winning prize ball device 7 is won, the light emitting members 9ATR and 9ATL are displayed in the color C as a special winning opening winning effect unless the control data is set in the control data area of a layer larger than the layer 3. It emits light (lights, blinks, etc.).

  In such a state, when the round starts when the exit control CPU 120 receives the special winning opening opening notification command at the time T1, the light-off control is performed in the control data area of the layer 2 having higher priority than the layer 1. When the data for use is set, the light-off control is turned on. Thus, the light emitting members 9ATR and 9ATL are turned off as shown in the lamp display mode.

  At time T2, the light emitting members 9ATR and 9ATL emit light in color C each time the special variable winning prize ball device 7 wins, until the effect control CPU 120 receives the notification command after opening the special winning opening, and the round ends. (Lighting, blinking, etc.), the light emitting members 9ATR, 9ATL emit light (light, blink, etc.) in color C. In this way, by turning off the light except when the special variable winning prize ball device 7 is won, the color C that emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) when the winning is achieved becomes conspicuous, and the interest of the game can be improved. And the player can more easily recognize the winning. The special variable prize ball device 7 may be illuminated (lit, blinked, etc.) other than when a prize is won, and may be turned off when a prize is won. Also in this case, the winning is remarkable.

  At the time T2, when the round ends, the setting of the light-off control data in the control data area of the layer 2 is reset, so that the light-off control is turned off. As a result, the control data is not set in the control data area of the layer whose priority is higher than that of layer 1, so that the BGM lamp control is turned on. As a result, the light emitting members 9ATL and 9ATR emit light (light on, blink, etc.) in the color E as shown in the lamp display mode.

  When the round starts again at the time T3, the light-off control data is set in the control data area of the layer 2 having a higher priority than the layer 1, so that the light-off control is turned on. Thus, the light emitting members 9ATR and 9ATL are turned off as shown in the lamp display mode. Until this round is over, the light-emitting members 9ATR and 9ATL emit (light, blink, etc.) in color C each time a prize is won in the special variable prize ball device 7, so that the light-emitting members 9ATR and 9ATL turn off or emit light in color C. (Lighting, blinking, etc.). Hereinafter, the light-off effect is repeatedly performed until the big hit state ends. As described above, in the small hitting game state, the special variable winning prize ball device 7 performs the variable winning operation of changing the large winning opening to an advantageous open state for the player in the same manner as the short-term opening big hit state. In the case where the opening time is extremely short as compared with the case of (1), the above-described light-off control may not be performed. This is because if the same control as in the case of the big hit is performed, the player may feel uncomfortable.

  According to the control shown in FIG. 47, a lamp effect with a low priority can be temporarily turned off, so that a light emitting pattern with a high priority can be made more prominent, so that the interest in the game can be improved. . In particular, it is suitable for a lamp effect that is often set such as a BGM effect, and an effect in which lamps are close to each other.

  An example of a process in the case of performing the lamp control using the control data setting area described above will be described.

  48 and 49 are flowcharts showing an example of the effect execution setting process executed in step S532 of the variable display start setting process of FIG. This flowchart is described using the control data area shown in FIG. 40A as an example. Also, in the description of this flowchart, “Setting the control data of the effect Y in the control data area of the layer N and setting the lamp control data of the effect control pattern of FIG. Is simply expressed as “set the control data of the effect Y in the layer N”. For example, the description “set the control data of the notice effect in layer 2” means “set the control data of the notice effect in the control data area of layer 2 and follow the start timing of the notice effect in FIG. ) To set the lamp control data of the effect control pattern.

  In the effect execution setting process shown in FIG. 48, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the error lamp is emitting light (step S901). The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the above-described error notification processing of step S75 has been executed.

  If the error lamp is being emitted (step S901; Yes), the effect production has the highest priority, and the production control CPU 120 proceeds to step S915 without setting the control data in the lower layer.

  If the error lamp is being emitted (Step S901; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the gaming state is the high base state (Step S902). When the gaming state is the high base state (Step S902; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern is a reach fluctuation pattern (Step S903). When the variation pattern is the reach variation pattern (step S903; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the control data for the BGM (reach variation) effect on Layer 2 (step S904), and proceeds to step S906. When the fluctuation pattern is not the reach fluctuation pattern (step S903; NO), the effect control CPU 120 sets the control data for the BGM (normal fluctuation) effect in Layer 1 (step S905), and proceeds to step S906.

  Next, effect control CPU 120 performs a notice determination process for determining whether to execute a notice effect (step S906). Here, it is determined using a fluctuation pattern and a random number value MR10 (not shown). For example, when the fluctuation pattern indicates the super reach α and β, it is determined using the random number value MR10. The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute an announcement effect based on the result of the announcement determination process (step S907). When not performing a notice effect (Step S907; No), it progresses to Step S909. When the notice effect is executed (Step S907; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the notice effect control data in Layer 3 (Step S908).

  Next, effect control CPU 120 performs a fixed notification determination process for determining whether to execute the fixed notification effect (step S909). Here, it is determined using a fluctuation pattern and a random number value MR11 (not shown). For example, when the variation pattern indicates a big hit, it is determined using the random number value MR11. The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the final notification effect based on the determination result of the final notification determination process (step S910). When the confirmation notification effect is not executed (Step S910; No), the process proceeds to Step S912. When the final notification effect is to be executed (Step S910; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the final notification effect control data in Layer 4 (Step S911). Next, effect control CPU 120 selects each effect control pattern determined in each determination process (step S912). Then, the effect execution setting process ends.

  Returning to the processing of step S902, when the gaming state is the low base state (step S902; No), the processing proceeds to step S913 of FIG. Effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern is a reach variation pattern (step S913). When the variation pattern is the reach variation pattern (step S913; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the control data for the BGM (reach variation) effect on Layer 1 (step S914), and proceeds to step S916. If the variation pattern is not a reach variation pattern (step S913; NO), effect control CPU 120 sets control data for a BGM (normal fluctuation) effect in layer 1 (step S915), and proceeds to step S916.

  Next, effect control CPU 120 performs an advance notice B determination process for determining whether to execute an advance notice B effect (step S916). Here, it is determined using a fluctuation pattern and a random number value MR10 (not shown). For example, when the fluctuation pattern indicates the super reach α and β, it is determined using the random number value MR10. The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the notice B effect based on the determination result of the notice B determination process (step S917). If the notice B effect is not to be executed (step S917; No), the process proceeds to step S919. When performing the notice B effect (Step S917; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the control data of the notice B effect in Layer 2 (Step S918).

  Next, effect control CPU 120 performs an advance notice A determination process for determining whether to execute an advance notice A effect (step S919). Here, it is determined using a fluctuation pattern and a random number value MR12 (not shown). For example, when the fluctuation pattern indicates the super reach α and β, it is determined using the random number value MR12. The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the notice A effect based on the determination result of the notice A determination process (step S920). When the notice A effect is not executed (Step S920; No), the process proceeds to Step S922. When the notice A effect is executed (Step S920; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the control data of the notice A effect in Layer 3 (Step S921).

  Next, effect control CPU 120 performs a fixed notification determination process for determining whether to execute the fixed notification effect (step S922). Here, it is determined using a fluctuation pattern and a random number value MR11 (not shown). For example, when the variation pattern indicates a big hit, it is determined using the random number value MR11. The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the final notification effect based on the determination result of the final notification determination process (step S923). When the confirmation notification effect is not to be executed (Step S923; No), the process proceeds to Step S912. When the final notification effect is to be executed (step S923; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the final notification effect control data in layer 4 (step S924).

  In addition to the control of the lamp 9 in the variable display start setting process described above, the control of the lamp 9 is also performed in the variable display start waiting process, the variable display effect process, the big hit effect process, and the like. For example, in the variable display start waiting process, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 receives the customer waiting demonstration designation command when the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 immediately displays the lamp 9 in a lamp manner in the customer waiting demonstration effect. On the other hand, when the BGM effect performs an effect in which a certain pattern is repeated, the effect control CPU 120 displays the lamp 9 in a lamp manner in the customer waiting demonstration effect several seconds after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command. As described above, even when the same customer waiting demonstration designation command is received, the control content differs depending on the situation.

  In addition, in the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp 9 based on the start timing set in the variable display start setting processing, and determines whether the time set for each effect has elapsed or not. When the display is completed, the setting of the control data for the effect is reset. Furthermore, in the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 may control the lamp 9 in accordance with the operation of the player. As an operation example of the player, there is, for example, an operation of pressing a trigger button of the stick controller 31A. In response to such a pressing operation, the effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp 9 in the variable display effect processing. In the big hit middle production process, the production control CPU 120 sets the control data shown in FIG. 40 (A) in the control data area to control the lamp 9, and sets the time determined for each production. , The setting of the control data of the effect is reset. In addition, in the middle of a jackpot effect process, the lamp 9 may be controlled in accordance with the operation of the player. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp 9 in response to a pressing operation.

(1) As described above, the gaming machines (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1, the slot machine, etc.) according to the above-described embodiment perform effects (for example, BGM effect, notice effect, confirmation notification effect, large winning opening winning effect, positive change winning). A light emitting device (for example, a lamp 9 or the like) capable of emitting light in a plurality of types of light emitting patterns (for example, a color pattern, a blinking pattern, etc.) corresponding to an effect, an error effect, and the like, and control means (for example, The control means is capable of controlling the light-emitting device to emit light in a predetermined light-emitting pattern when the control data is set in the control data area. The control data area includes one control data area (for example, a control data area of layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, or layer 5 in FIG. 40A) and another control data area. Data area (for example, a control data area different from one control data area among the control data areas of layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, and layer 5). When control data is set in one of the control data areas (for example, any one of the control data areas of layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, and layer 5) Is a light emission pattern corresponding to a control data area in which control data is set (for example, a light emission pattern corresponding to a BGM effect, a notice effect, a confirmation notification effect, a winning prize winning effect, a positive change prize effect, an error effect, and the like). The light emitting device is controlled to emit light, and two control data areas (for example, two of the control data areas of layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, and layer 5) are controlled. In the case where the control data is set in the control data area, the priority order (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, layer 5, etc.) is set higher in the order of lower priority. The light emitting device can be controlled to emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the control data area during the first game state (for example, a low base state in FIG. 40A, a normal state in the case of a slot machine, etc.). ) In one control data area (for example, the control data area of the low base state layer 2 in FIG. 40A) and the control data (for example, the low base state layer 2 of FIG. 40A). The light emission pattern when the notice data B control effect data set in the control data area is set, and during the second game state different from the first game state (for example, the high base in FIG. 40A) State, slot machine Control data (for example, control data for a BGM effect set in the control data area of the layer 2 in the high base state in FIG. 40A) in one control data area in the chance zone or the like in the case of the thin. ) Is different from the light emission pattern when () is set.

  According to such a configuration, a ramp effect can be performed in a priority order according to the game state, so that interest in the game can be improved.

(2) The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, or the like) which is one embodiment of the present invention has effects (for example, A light emitting device capable of emitting light in a plurality of types of light emission patterns (for example, color patterns, blinking patterns, etc.) corresponding to BGM effects, notice effects, confirmation notification effects, winning prize winning effects, positive change winning effects, error effects, etc. For example, a lamp 9 or the like) and control means (for example, effect control CPU 120 or the like) capable of controlling the light emitting device are provided, and the control means is provided when the control data is set in the control data area. The light emitting device can be controlled so as to emit light in a predetermined light emitting pattern, and the control data area is one control data area (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3 in FIG. 40A). One of the control data areas of the layer 4 and layer 5 control data areas and other control data areas (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4 and layer 5 control data areas) And at least one of the control data areas (for example, one of the control data areas of Layer 1, Layer 2, Layer 3, Layer 4, and Layer 5). When the control data is set in the control data area, the light emission pattern corresponding to the control data area in which the control data is set (for example, BGM effect, notice effect, confirmation notification effect, large winning opening) The light emitting device is controlled to emit light in a winning effect, a winning change effect, an error effect, and the like, and both control data areas (for example, layer 1, layer 2, and laser light) are controlled. If the control data is set in two control data areas among the control data areas of layer 3, layer 4, and layer 5), priority (for example, layer 1, It is possible to control the light emitting device to emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the control data area in which the layer 2, the layer 3, the layer 4, the layer 5, and the like are set high. When control data is set in the control data area of layer 2 in FIG. 45, new control data (a control different from the currently set control data) is set in the one control data area. (For example, a priority flag shown in FIG. 45) for prohibiting the setting of the setting data and the currently set control data.

  According to such a configuration, the lamp effect can be diversified even in a limited control data area, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

(3) The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, and the like) according to one embodiment of the present invention has effects to be executed (for example, A light emitting device capable of emitting light in a plurality of types of light emission patterns (for example, color patterns, blinking patterns, etc.) corresponding to BGM effects, notice effects, confirmation notification effects, winning prize winning effects, positive change winning effects, error effects, etc. For example, a lamp 9 or the like) and control means (for example, effect control CPU 120 or the like) capable of controlling the light emitting device are provided, and the control means is provided when the control data is set in the control data area. The light emitting device can be controlled so as to emit light in a predetermined light emitting pattern, and the control data area is one control data area (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3 in FIG. 40A). One of the control data areas of the layer 4 and layer 5 control data areas and other control data areas (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4 and layer 5 control data areas) And at least one of the control data areas (for example, one of the control data areas of Layer 1, Layer 2, Layer 3, Layer 4, and Layer 5). When the control data is set in the control data area, the light emission pattern corresponding to the control data area in which the control data is set (for example, BGM effect, notice effect, confirmation notification effect, large winning opening) The light emitting device is controlled to emit light in a winning effect, a winning change effect, an error effect, and the like, and both control data areas (for example, layer 1, layer 2, and laser light) are controlled. If the control data is set in two control data areas among the control data areas of layer 3, layer 4, and layer 5), priority (for example, layer 1, (Layer 2, Layer 3, Layer 4, Layer 5, etc.) can be controlled so that the light-emitting device emits light in a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the control data area in which the priority is set. The first data area (for example, the control data area of the layer 1, etc.), the second data area (for example, the control data area of the layer 2, etc.), and the third data area (for example, the control data of the layer 3, etc.) Area, etc.), and as control data set in the second data area, control data for controlling the light emitting device to emit light (for example, the light emitting members 9ATL and 9ATR are caused to emit light). Control data to control the light emitting device to be turned off, and control data (for example, control data for a BGM effect) to be set in the first data area. In this case, the light-off control data is set in the second data area, and when the light-off control data is set, the control data (for example, the control of the special winning opening winning effect) is stored in the third data area. Data, etc.) can be set.

  According to such a configuration, a light emitting pattern with a high priority can be made more prominent, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  The effect description shown in FIGS. 41 to 49 is an example, and the effect corresponding to the claims and the means for solving the problem may be applied to a game state other than those shown in FIGS. 41 to 49. Specifically, for example, the game state shown in FIG. 41 is a low base state, but may be applied to a big hit state.

  Further, the effect in the control of the lamp 9 described above is a sound effect. However, the effect is not limited to the sound effect, but may be an effect executed on the image display device 5, an effect for operating a character, or the like. Although the number of layers is set to 5, the number of layers may be two or more. Further, the setting data area is provided for each of the low base state, the high base state, and the big hit state, but is not limited thereto, and may be provided for each of various states such as the low-precision high-base state and the high-precision high-base state. It may be. Further, as the gaming state in the slot machine, there are RT, AT, ART, regular bonus, big bonus, and the like in addition to the above-mentioned normal time and chance zone, so that a setting data area may be provided for each state. Good.

  As the control data set in the control data area described above, control data output to the lamp control board 14 has been described as an example. However, an address of data indicating a light emission pattern, or 1-bit data indicating on / off, etc. It may be.

  When the address of the data indicating the light emission pattern is set in the control data area, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the address set in the control data area, and writes the control data stored in the address to the ramp. The data is output to the control board 14, and if the control data area is NULL, it is determined that the control data is not set.

  When 1-bit data indicating on / off is set in the control data area, the effect control CPU 120 responds to the control data area when “1” indicating on is set in the control data area. Is output to the lamp control board 14, and if "0" indicating OFF is set in the control data area, it is determined that the control data is not set. Therefore, when "0" is set, the control data indicating the light emission pattern of the effect corresponding to the control data area is not output to the lamp control board 14, so that the lamp 9 does not emit light in the light emission pattern. Becomes

  In addition, although the embodiment based on the difference in color has been described as the light emission pattern of the lamp, the present invention is not limited to this, and a blinking pattern having a different light emission interval may be used. Further, specific examples of the colors A, B, C, D, and E include blue, yellow, green, red, gold, and rainbow, but light may be emitted in a plurality of colors.

  Furthermore, although the luminescent colors are represented using alphabets, the colors represented by the same alphabet in different drawings may be the same colors or different colors. For example, the color A in FIG. 41 and the color A in FIG. 42 may be the same color or different colors.

  In addition, the above-described final notification effect is an effect performed not only in a pachinko gaming machine but also in a slot machine. Specifically, for example, in a variable display device of a slot machine in which a reel unit including three reels is provided, a reel lamp that emits light from the back of the reel blinks in a V-shape. The confirmation notification effect in the slot machine is generally an effect performed by a confirmation notification notice before the AT or the big bonus is determined.

(4) In the gaming machine of (1), (2), or (3), the control means may control the control data area to which the highest priority is set (for example, the control data area of layer 5 in FIG. 40A). When control data is set in an area or the like, control is performed so as to emit light in a light emitting pattern indicating an error regardless of the gaming state.

  According to such a configuration, an error can be appropriately reported.

(5) In the gaming machine of (1), (2), (3), and (4), first control data (for example, the first light emission pattern that causes the light emitting device to emit light in the first light emission pattern when set in the control data area) The control data for the notice A effect in FIG. 40A) and the second control data for causing the light emitting device to emit light in the second light emission pattern when set in the control data area exist. In the state (for example, the low base state in FIG. 40A), the first control data (for example, the control data for the notice A effect set in layer 3 in FIG. 40A) is the second control data. Is set in a control data area having a higher priority than the control data (for example, the control data of the notice B effect set in the layer 2 of FIG. 40A), and a game state different from one game state (for example, , In the high base state of FIG. The control data (for example, the control data for the notice A effect set in layer 2 of FIG. 40B) is the second control data (for example, the notice B effect set in layer 3 of FIG. 40B). Is set in a control data area having a lower priority than (control data).

  According to such a configuration, a ramp effect can be performed in a priority order according to the game state, so that interest in the game can be improved.

(6) In the gaming machine of (1), (2), (3), (4), and (5), control data (for example, a notice α effect set in the control data area of layer 2 in FIG. 46A) (For example, in the case of a pachinko game machine, the start of the variable display starts, the stop of the variable display ends, and in the case of a slot machine, When the user starts the operation of the start lever and ends when the rotation of all the reels stops, the control means terminates the control of the light emitting device by the control means (for example, FIG. 46A). When the control data area of the layer 2 or the like and the control data (for example, the control data of the pending effect set in the control data area of the layer 1 of FIG. 46B) are set, Whether the game has ended Unchanged, the control data area control continues emitting device by the control means (e.g., FIG. 46 (control data area of the layer 1 of B), etc.), characterized in that a and.

  According to such a configuration, a ramp effect can be performed over a plurality of games, so that the interest of the games can be improved.

  An example in which the ramp control for performing a ramp effect over a plurality of games described with reference to FIG. 46 is applied to a slot machine will be described. First, one game in the slot machine is started by a player operating a start lever, and ends when the rotation of all reels is stopped. Therefore, when the ramp control described in FIG. 46 is applied to the slot machine, the control data area where the control of the ramp 9 ends when the rotation of all the reels stops, and whether the rotation of all the reels has stopped or not. Irrespective of this, a control data area in which the control of the lamp 9 is continued is provided. In the case of a slot machine, an effect that indicates that a child role has been established is given as an effect that ends when the rotation of all reels stops, and an effect that continues regardless of whether the variable display is stopped or not is a sign, ART, or the like. , AT, and RT effects.

(7) In the gaming machine of (1), (2), (3), (4), (5), and (6), a special image (for example, an active display AH or the like) including a digestion display (for example, an active display AH) corresponding to the variable display. An image combining the active display AH and the active display area AHA, etc.) can be displayed, and the display mode of the special image is more highly expected during variable display (for example, “star” shown in FIG. 31B). , And "special thickness" shown in FIG. 32B), and a specific effect (for example, a suggestion effect or the like) suggesting a change to a mode of higher expectation has a plurality of timings (for example, as shown in FIG. 29A). It is characterized in that the degree of expectation that the display mode of the special image changes is different depending on which of timing 1 and timing 3) shown in FIG. 32A is executed.

  According to such a configuration, the player's expectation can be improved by paying attention to the execution timing of the specific effect.

  The embodiment of the present invention has been described above. However, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, various rendering operations including the rendering image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, and the like. Can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  For example, when the display mode of the active display displayed in the active display area AHA is a special mode, even if a hold change effect is executed on any of the hold displays displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H. If there is a hold display displayed in a special mode in any of the hold displays displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H, any of the hold displays displayed in the start win storage display area 5H, or an active display May be executed for the hold change effect or the active display change effect.

  For example, either the first system change effect or the second system change effect may be an effect that changes the color of the active display in the display mode of the active display. In this case, for example, as in the first system change effect in which the shape is changed or the second system change effect in which the thickness of the line of the active display frame is changed, it is displayed in the hold display displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H. The display mode of the active display is changed to a display mode of a color (for example, a color such as yellow or red in the case of the hold display that has been displayed in blue) having a higher expectation of a big hit than the color of the hold display that has been displayed. May be changed.

  For example, the active display colors included in the special image displayed in the active display area AHA have different degrees of expectation that a successful effect will be performed. For example, FIGS. A setting example of the determination ratio of the effect mode set as in (C) may be used, or a successful effect for the active display is executed by the color of the active display included in the special image displayed in the active display area AHA. A setting example of the display mode determination ratio set so that the display ratio of the active display such as the color of the active display after the setting is different may be used.

  For example, in the example of setting the determination ratio by the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table in FIG. 26, the active pattern change effect of the variation pattern “PA4-X” is “executed” and “not executed”, such as 45%. (The sum of the first system change effect 15%, the second system change effect 10%, the first system change effect and the second system change effect 20%) A ratio may be set for each of them, and the present embodiment may be such that the ratio between “executed” and “not executed” is 0% to 100% as in the variation pattern “PA1-X” in FIG. May be set such that one of the plurality is set as 0%.

  In addition, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, and various rendering operations including the rendering image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5 deviate from the gist of the present invention. Any changes and modifications can be made without departing from the scope.

  For example, using a frequency, which is a game value of a size specified from the recording information of a game recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card, to give a game score for use in the game, The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by hitting a gaming ball enclosed in the gaming machine into a gaming area using a score or a game score given by a prize in a game.

  That is, based on a game medium passing through a start area provided in the game area, a variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each of which can be identified and deriving and displaying a display result, When the predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed on the display means, the gaming machine is controlled to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player. However, when the gaming score is not 0, the gaming score is used in the gaming machine. The game is performed by hitting the game ball enclosed in the game area, the game score is subtracted according to the shot of the game ball, and the game score is set according to the game ball winning in the prize area provided in the game area. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that adds. Such a gaming machine has a game recording medium insertion slot for inserting a game recording medium in which information capable of specifying the magnitude of a game value usable for addition of a game score is recorded, and a game recording medium. A game recording medium processing means for reading recorded information recorded on the game recording medium inserted into the medium insertion slot may be provided.

  Also, in the above description, when the variation is started, the variation is started to notify the variation control microcomputer (the production control CPU 120) of the variation pattern indicating the variation mode such as the variation time, the type of the reach effect, and the presence or absence of the pseudo-run. Although an example in which one variation pattern command is transmitted has been described, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying using two commands, the game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103) uses the first command to determine whether or not there is a pseudo-run, whether or not there is a sliding effect, etc. A command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode (before the so-called second stop) is transmitted to the second command. The second command indicates the type of reach and the presence or absence of a re-lottery effect. The command indicating the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode (after the so-called second stop) may be transmitted. In this case, the effect control microcomputer may perform the effect control in the fluctuation display based on the fluctuation time derived from the combination of the two commands. In addition, the microcomputer 100 for game control notifies the fluctuating time by each of the two commands, and the specific fluctuating mode executed at each timing is selected by the effect control microcomputer. Is also good. When two commands are sent, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After the first command is sent, a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. As described above, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  The programs and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium. It may be distributed by pre-installing it in the storage device of the server. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, programs and data for implementing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

  The game can be executed not only by installing a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the program may be directly executed using hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko gaming machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 5HL ... First start winning storage storage display area 5HR ... Second start winning storage storage display area 5H ... Start winning Memory display area 6A ... Normal winning ball device 6B ... Normal variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8 ... Speaker 9 ... Lamp 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Voice control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Normal symbol display 21 ... Gate switch 22A ... First starting port switch 22B ... Second starting port switch 23 ... Count switch 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 100 ... Game control microcomputers 101 and 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuits 105, 125 ... I / O
120… effect control CPU
123 ... display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine,
Light emitting means capable of emitting light in a plurality of types of light emitting patterns corresponding to the effect to be executed,
A storage unit provided with a plurality of control data areas each of which can set control data capable of specifying a light emission pattern,
Setting means for setting control data in each of the plurality of control data areas;
Control means for controlling the light emitting means based on the control data set in the plurality of control data areas ,
With
The setting means,
In the predetermined game state, when any of a plurality of types of conditions that can be satisfied in the predetermined game state is satisfied , control data is set in a control data area corresponding to each of the conditions ,
The control means includes:
When the control data is set only in one control data area of the plurality of control data areas, the light emitting unit emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the control data set in the one control data area. Is controlled to emit light,
When the control data is set in a plurality of control data areas among the plurality of control data areas, the control data area is set in a control data area having a higher priority set among the plurality of control data areas . controlled so as to the light emitting means in a light emission pattern corresponding to the control data,
The plurality of types of conditions are a first condition that is satisfied when a predetermined game state is established, a second condition that is satisfied when a specific event that can occur in a specific period in the predetermined game state occurs, and the specific period. And a third condition that is sometimes satisfied,
The plurality of control data areas include a first control data area, a second control data area having a higher priority than the first control data area, and a second control data area having a higher priority than the second control data area. Including 3 control data areas,
The setting means,
When the first condition is satisfied, the control data according to the first condition is set in the first control data area,
When the second condition is satisfied, control data according to the second condition is set in a third control data area,
When the third condition is satisfied, the control data according to the third condition is set in the second control data area,
The control data according to the third condition is control data for specifying a pattern for turning off the light emitting means as a light emitting pattern of the light emitting means,
A gaming machine, wherein control data of a light emission pattern for causing a light emitting means to emit light in a second control data area in a predetermined game state can be set .